GA32 0543 20 IBM System N Intro and Planning Guide

IBM System Storage N series
Introduction and Planning Guide
GA32-0543-22
IBM System Storage N series
Introduction and Planning Guide
GA32-0543-22
Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in Notices on page 251.
The following paragraph does not apply to any country (or region) where such provisions are inconsistent with local law. INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states (or regions) do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you. Order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch office serving your locality. Copyright IBM Corporation 2005, 2011. US Government Users Restricted Rights Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Contents
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Safety notices . . . . . . Safety notices and labels . . . Danger notices . . . . . . Labels . . . . . . . . . Caution notices . . . . . . Attention notices . . . . . Laser safety . . . . . . . . Usage restrictions. . . . . Rack safety . . . . . . . . Rack installation . . . . . Safety inspection procedure . Rack relocation (19" rack) . . Relocating the rack . . . Fire suppression systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii . xiii . xiii . xiv . xv . xv . xvi . xvi . xvii . xvii . xvii . xx . xxi . xxi
About this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii Who should read this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii Supported features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii How this document is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii Notices and statements used in this document. . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv Getting information, help, and service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv Before you call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv Using the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv Web sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv Hardware service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv Supported servers and operating systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi Firmware updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi Terminology and conventions used in this document . . . . . . . . . . xxvi Active/active and high-availability terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi Storage terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii Command conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii Formatting conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii Keyboard conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii How to send your comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system IBM N series storage systems and storage expansion units . Storage expansion unit support . . . . . . . . . . . Intermixing EXN units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting storage expansion units to N series systems . Storage expansion unit cabling requirements . . . . Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . Data ONTAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL) . . . . . . . . . Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adapter support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High availability or active/active configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 5 6 6 7
Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 N3300 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 N3300 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2011
iii
N3300 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting storage expansion units to the N3300 . . . N3300 feature codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . N3400 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . N3400 A11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N3400 A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting storage expansion units to the N3400 . . . N3400 feature codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . N3600 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . N3600 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N3600 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting storage expansion units to the N3600 . . . N3600 feature codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . N3700 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the differences between early and current modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting storage expansion units to the N3700 . . . N3700 feature codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5200 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . N5200 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5200 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting storage expansion units to the N5200 filer . N5200 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . N5200 gateway hardware features. . . . . . . . . . N5200 G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5200 G20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . N5200 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . N5300 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . N5300 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5300 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting storage expansion units to the N5300 filer . N5300 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . N5300 gateway hardware features. . . . . . . . . . N5300 Model G10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5300 Model G20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . N5300 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . N5500 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . N5500 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5500 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting storage expansion units to the N5500 filer . N5500 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . N5500 gateway hardware features. . . . . . . . . . N5500 G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5500 G20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . N5500 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . N5600 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . N5600 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5600 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting storage expansion units to the N5600 filer . N5600 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . N5600 gateway hardware features. . . . . . . . . . N5600 Model G10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5600 Model G20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N3700 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 10 12 13 13 13 14 15 16 16 17 17 19 20 21 22 23 23 24 25 26 27 28 28 29 30 30 30 31 31 32 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 39 40 41 42 42 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 49 50 50 51
iv
IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide
Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . N5600 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . N6040 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . N6040 Model A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N6040 Model A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting storage expansion units to the N6040 . . N6040 feature codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . N6060 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . N6060 Model A12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N6060 Model A22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting storage expansion units to the N6060 . . N6060 feature codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . N6070 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . N6070 Model A11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N6070 Model A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting storage expansion units to the N6070 . . N6070 feature codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . N6210 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . N6210 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting storage expansion units to the N6210 . . N6210 feature codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . N6240 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . N6240 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting storage expansion units to the N6240 . . N6240 feature codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . N7700 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . N7700 A11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N7700 A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting storage expansion units to the N7700 filer Connecting an N7700 gateway to external storage . . N7700 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . N7900 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . N7900 A11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N7900 A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting storage expansion units to the N7900 filer Connecting an N7900 gateway to external storage . . N7900 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . EXN1000 storage expansion unit hardware features . . EXN1000 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . EXN2000 storage expansion unit hardware features . . EXN2000 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . EXN3000 storage expansion unit hardware features . . EXN3000 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . EXN4000 storage expansion unit hardware features . . EXN4000 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . Rack mount requirements . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51 52 52 53 54 54 56 57 57 58 59 61 61 62 62 63 65 66 66 68 69 70 70 72 73 74 74 75 76 77 78 79 79 80 81 82 82 83 84 85 85 86 87 87 88 88
Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features Software packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software bundles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM N series controller software feature codes . . . . . . IBM N series host software features . . . . . . . . .
. 89 . 93 . 94 . 98 . . . . . . . 106
Chapter 4. Site planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 System connectivity requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Fibre Channel connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Contents
Ethernet connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using older cables with PCI-X and PCIe 10GBASE-SR cards Circuit breaker and power outlet balancing requirements . . . Balancing the load across PDUs . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of balancing the load with a single component . Examples of balancing the load with two components . . Connecting your system to an ASCII terminal console . . . . ASCII terminal console wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . DB-9 to RJ-45 console adapter pin connections . . . . . Connecting to an ASCII terminal console . . . . . . . . Hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How the measurements are made . . . . . . . . . . Converting watts to volt-amps (VA) . . . . . . . . . . Important information about ambient temperature . . . . . N3300, N3400 and N3600 hardware specifications . . . . N3700 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . N5000 series system hardware specifications . . . . . . N6000 series system hardware specifications . . . . . . N6200 series hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . N7000 series hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . EXN1000 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . EXN2000 and EXN4000 hardware specifications . . . . . EXN3000 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . Important factors to consider . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supplies and power requirements . . . . . . . . . System input power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Primary computer power service . . . . . . . . . . Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Computer room emergency power-off controls . . . . . Lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three-phase power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermal considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor-loading specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor plan considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a floor plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5. Cable planning. General considerations . . Cable measuring. . . . . Cable labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112 113 114 114 114 115 116 117 117 117 118 118 119 119 119 131 133 137 142 145 148 150 153 156 157 157 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 160 160 160 161 163 163 164 164 167 167 167 167 168 168 168 168
Chapter 6. AutoSupport. . . . . . . . . How does AutoSupport work? . . . . . . . Interaction with mail hosts . . . . . . . Subject line of AutoSupport e-mail messages Short e-mail messages for urgent events . . Recipients of AutoSupport e-mail messages. Technical Support response. . . . . . . Cluster considerations . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix A. Recommended power line sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Recommended AC power line sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
vi
Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems . . . . . . . 171 FRU/CRU list for N series products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Power cord list for N series products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Appendix C. Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks 2101 Model N00 rack specifications . . . . . . . . . 2101 Model N42 rack specifications . . . . . . . . . 7014 Rack specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model T00 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model T42 Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T00 and T42 service clearances and caster location. . T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments . . . . . . T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading . Rack specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General safety requirements for IBM products installed in a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . non-IBM rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 175 176 177 177 178 178 179 180 181 184 187 187 187 188 188 188 189 189 189 189 190 190 190 191 191 191
Appendix D. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600 . . . . . . Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . . Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) . . . . . . . . . Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015). . . . . . . . . Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021) . . . . . . . . . Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . . Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) . . . . . SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036). . . . . . . . . . Dual-port Mini-SAS Adapter (FC 1060). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1062) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) (FC 1003) . . . . . . . . . Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1004). . . . . . . Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1005) . . . . . . Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateway and MetroCluster filer) (FC 1006) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007) . . . . . . Single-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet (10-GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1008) . . . Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) (FC 1009) . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010) . . . . . . . . Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011) . . . . . . . . SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD Tape Adapter (FC 1016) . . . . . . . Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1018) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1019). . . . . . . . . Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1020) . . . . . . . Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for Disk (FC 1027) . . . . . . . SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034) . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
193 193 194 194 195 195 196 196 196 196 197 197 197 198 198 199
Contents
vii
Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . . Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014). . . . . Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . . Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017). . . . . . . . . . Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) (FC 1021) . . . . . . . . . . . . Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . . . . . . Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk/tape attachment (FC 1029) Support and cabling rules for the HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling rules for stand-alone controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) . . . . . Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1032). . . . . . SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) . . . . . . . . . . . . Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) Support and cabling rules for the HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling rules for stand-alone controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036). . . . . . . . . . 16-GB Performance Accelerator module (PCIe) (FC 1056) . . . . . . . . 256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . . Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014). . . . . Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . . Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017). . . . . . . . . . Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) (FC 1021) . . . . . . . . . . . . Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . . . . . . Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030) . . . . . . . . Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/A21/A22 only) (FC 1032) . . . . SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) . . . . . . . . . . . . Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036). . . . . . . . . . 16 GB Performance Acceleration Module (FC 1056). . . . . . . . . . . 512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
201 202 202 202 203 203 204 204 204 205 205 205 206 206 206 207 207 207 208 208 208 209 209 210 210 210 211 212 212 212 213 213 214 214 214 214 215 215 216 216 216 217 217 217 218 218 219 219 219
viii
Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014). . . . . Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . . Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017). . . . . . . . . . Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . . Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) . . . . Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030) . . . . . . . . Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036). . . . . . . . . . 512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet NIC (FC 1065) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1066). . . . . . . . . . 8-Gbps SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1067) . . . . . . . . . Appendix I. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems PCI-X Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007) . . . . . Single-port 10 GbE TOE adapter (FC 1008) . . . . . . . . . . . . Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet TOE adapter (FC 1009) . . . . . . . . . Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010) . . . . . . . Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011) . . . . . . . SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter (FC 1016) . . . . . . SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034) . . . . . . . . . . PCI-Express (PCIe) adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014). . . Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017). . . . . . . . Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021) . . . . . . . Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk or tape attachment (FC 1029) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) . . . Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031) . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/A21 only) (FC 1032) . . . . SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) . . . . . . . . . . Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1036) . . . 16-GB Performance Acceleration Module I (FC 1056) . . . . . . . . 512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
221 222 222 222 223 223 224 224 225 225 226 226 226 227 227 227 227 228 229 229 229 230 230 230 230 231 231 231 232 233 233 233 234 234 234 235 235 235 236 236 236 237 237 238 238 239
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 239 . 239 . 240
Contents
ix
Appendix J. Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First time installations: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement or additional module installations. . . . . . . . . . . Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module . . . . . . . Enabling the WAFL extended cache software license and functionality . . . Enabling the WAFL extended cache configuration options . . . . . . . Completing the replacement process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix K. IBM System Storage N series documentation . . . . . . N7000 series systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N6000 series systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5000 series systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N3300, N3400 and N3600 storage systems library . . . . . . . . . . N3700 storage system library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN3000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units library Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data ONTAP 7.3 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data ONTAP 7.2 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data ONTAP 7.1 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data ONTAP 7.2 and later gateway systems library . . . . . . . . . . Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other N series and N series-related documents . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
241 241 241 241 242 242 243 243 244 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 246 246 247 248 249 249 250 251 251 252 252 253 253 253 253 254 255 255 255 255 255 256 256 256 256
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copyrights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Class A Statement . . . . . Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement . . . . . . . Avis de conformit la rglementation d'Industrie Canada . . . . . . . European Union EMC Directive Conformance Statement . . . . . . . . Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive . . . . . . . . . . . People's Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission Statement . . . . Japan VCCI Council Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Korea Communications Commission (KCC) Statement . . . . . . . . . Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class A Statement . . . . . . Taiwan Class A Electronic Emission Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . Taiwan Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figures
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Ground check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port labeling for early N3700 CPU module designs . . . . . . . Port labeling for current N3700 CPU module designs . . . . . . LC connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Base-T/100Base-T/1000Base-T NICs . . . . . . . . . . . 1000Base-SX NICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSUs on opposite sides of the component . . . . . . . . . . PSUs on the same side of the component . . . . . . . . . . PSUs stacked on the same side of the component . . . . . . . PSUs on opposite sides of the component . . . . . . . . . . PSUs on the same side of the component . . . . . . . . . . PSUs stacked on the same side of the component . . . . . . . Example of cold aisle/hot aisle rack cabinet configuration . . . . Service clearances and caster locations for the T00 and T42 racks. Model T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments . . . . . . . . Top view of non-IBM rack specifications dimensions . . . . . . Rack specifications dimensions, top front view . . . . . . . . Rack specifications dimensions, bottom front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix . 21 . 22 . 111 . 112 . 113 . 114 . 115 . 115 . 115 . 116 . 116 . 160 . 179 . 179 . 181 . 182 . 183
xi
xii
Safety notices
This section contains information about: v Safety notices and labels v Laser safety on page xvi v Rack safety on page xvii v Fire suppression systems on page xxi For information about environmental notices, see the IBM Environmental Notices and User Guide, Z125-5823.
Safety notices and labels

When using this product, observe the danger, caution, and attention notices contained in this guide. The notices are accompanied by symbols that represent the severity of the safety condition. The following sections define each type of safety notice and provide examples. The following notices and statements are used in IBM documents. They are listed below in order of increasing severity of potential hazards. Follow the links for more detailed descriptions and examples of the danger, caution, and attention notices in the sections that follow. v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice. v Attention notices on page xv: These notices indicate potential damage to programs, devices, or data. v Caution notices on page xv: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous to you. v Danger notices: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to you. Safety labels are also attached directly to products to warn of these situations. v In addition to these notices, Labels on page xiv may be attached to the product to warn of potential hazards.
Danger notices
A danger notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to people. A lightning bolt symbol accompanies a danger notice to represent a dangerous electrical condition. A sample danger notice follows.
DANGER An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous voltage on metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the system. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock.
A comprehensive danger notice provides instructions on how to avoid shock hazards when servicing equipment. Unless instructed otherwise, follow the procedures in the following danger notice.
xiii
DANGER Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described below when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn everything OFF (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove power cords from the outlet. 3. Remove signal cables from connectors. 4. Remove all cables from devices. To Connect: 1. Turn everything OFF (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to devices. 3. Attach signal cables to connectors. 4. Attach power cords to outlet. 5. Turn device ON.
Labels
As an added precaution, safety labels are often installed directly on products or product components to warn of potential hazards. The actual product safety labels may differ from these sample safety labels:
DANGER Hazardous voltage, current, or energy levels are present inside any component that has this label attached.
Do not service, there are no serviceable parts.
xiv
DANGER Multiple power cords
To remove all power to the device, disconnect all power cords.
Caution notices
A caution notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to people because of some existing condition. A caution notice can be accompanied by different symbols, as in the examples below:
If the symbol is... It means... A hazardous electrical condition with less severity than electrical danger.
A generally hazardous condition not represented by other safety symbols.
A hazardous condition due to the use of a laser in the product. Laser symbols are always accompanied by the classification of the laser as defined by the U. S. Department of Health and Human Services (for example, Class I, Class II, and so forth).
Sample caution notices:

CAUTION: This product is equipped with a 3wire (two conductors and ground) power cable and plug. Use this power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock.
CAUTION: Data processing environments can contain equipment transmitting on system links with laser modules that operate at greater than Class 1 power levels. For this reason, never look into the end of an optical fiber cable or open receptacle.
Attention notices
An attention notice indicates the possibility of damage to a program, device, or system, or to data. An exclamation point symbol may accompany an attention notice, but is not required. A sample attention notice follows:
Attention: Do not bend a fibre cable to a radius less than 5 cm (2 in.); you can damage the cable. Tie wraps are not recommended for optical cables because they can be easily overtightened, causing damage to the cable.
Safety notices
xv
Laser safety
When using an NVRAM5 or NVRAM6 cluster media converter, the storage system must be installed in a restricted access location. CAUTION: This product contains a Class 1M laser. Do not view directly with optical instruments. (C028) This equipment contains Class 1 laser products, and complies with FDA radiation Performance Standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J and the international laser safety standard IEC 825-2.
CAUTION: Data processing environments can contain equipment transmitting on system links with laser modules that operate at greater than Class 1 power levels. For this reason, never look into the end of an optical fiber cable or open receptacle.
Attention: In the United States, use only SFP or GBIC optical transceivers that comply with the FDA radiation performance standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J. Internationally, use only SFP or GBIC optical transceivers that comply with IEC standard 8251. Optical products that do not comply with these standards may product light that is hazardous to the eyes.
Usage restrictions
The optical ports of the modules must be terminated with an optical connector or with a dust plug.
xvi
Rack safety Rack installation

DANGER v Always lower the leveling pads on the rack cabinet. v Always install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet. v To avoid hazardous conditions due to uneven mechanical loading, always install the heaviest devices in the bottom of the rack cabinet. Always install servers and optional devices starting from the bottom of the rack cabinets. v Rack-mounted devices are not to be used as a shelf or work space. Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted devices. v Each rack cabinet might have more than one power cord. Be sure to disconnect all power cords in the rack cabinet before servicing any device in the rack cabinet. v Connect all devices installed in a rack cabinet to power devices installed in the same rack cabinet. Do not plug a power cord from a device installed in one rack cabinet into a power device installed in a different rack cabinet.
CAUTION: v Do not install a unit in a rack where the internal rack ambient temperatures will exceed the manufacturer's recommended ambient temperature for all your rack-mounted devices. v Do not install a unit in a rack where the air flow is compromised. Ensure that air flow is not blocked or reduced on any side, front, or back of a unit used for air flow through the unit. v Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit so that overloading of the circuits does not compromise the supply wiring or overcurrent protection. v To provide the correct power connection to a rack, refer to the rating labels located on the equipment in the rack to determine the total power requirement of the supply circuit. v This drawer is a fixed drawer and should not be moved for servicing unless specified by manufacturer. Attempting to move the drawer partially or completely out of the rack may cause the rack to become unstable or cause the drawer to fall out of the rack.
Safety inspection procedure

Perform a safety inspection on the rack when any of the following conditions occur: v The rack is inspected under a maintenance agreement. v Service is requested and service has not recently been performed. v An alterations-and-attachments review is performed. v Changes have been made to the equipment that might affect the safe operation of the equipment.
Safety notices
xvii
v External devices with an attached power cord are connected to the rack. Be cautious of potential safety hazards that are not covered in the safety checks. If the inspection indicates an unacceptable safety condition, the condition must be corrected before you can service the machine. Note: It is the responsibility of the owner of the system to correct any unsafe condition. Do the following safety checks: 1. If the rack is bolted down, ensure that the rack is firmly secured to the floor. 2. If the rack is not bolted down, ensure that the stabilizers are firmly attached to both the bottom front and bottom rear of the rack. CAUTION: The stabilizer must be firmly attached to the bottom front and bottom rear of the rack to prevent the rack from turning over when the filers or storage expansion units are pulled out of the rack. Do not pull out or install any filer or storage expansion unit or feature if the stabilizer is not attached to the rack. 3. Check the covers for sharp edges and for damage or alterations that expose the internal parts of the rack. 4. Check the covers for a proper fit to the rack. The covers should be in place and secure. 5. Open the back door of the rack. 6. Perform the power-off procedure for the power distribution unit (PDU) that is installed in the rack. 7. Check for alterations or attachments. If there are any, check for obvious safety hazards such as broken wires, sharp edges, or broken insulation. 8. Check the internal cables for damage. 9. Check for dirt, water, and any other contamination within the rack. 10. Check the voltage label on the back of the system unit to ensure that it matches the voltage at the outlet. 11. Check the external power cable for damage. 12. Perform the following grounding checks: a. With the external power cord connected to the system unit, check for 0.1 ohm or less resistance between the ground plug on the external power cord plug and the metal frame. See Figure 1 on page xix.
xviii
Rear View
L1
L1
L1
RT000015
Figure 1. Ground check
b. Using the appropriate probe, check for 0.1 ohm or less resistance between the metal frame and the grounding pin on each of the power outlets on each power distribution bus. 13. Check for the following conditions for each external device that has an attached power cord: v Damage to the power cord. v The correct grounded power cord. v With the external power cord connected to the device, check for 0.1 ohm or less resistance between the ground lug on the external power cord plug and the metal frame of the device. 14. Close the rear cover of the rack. 15. Perform the power-on procedure for the PDU that is installed in the rack.
Safety notices
xix
Rack relocation (19" rack)

CAUTION: Removing components from the upper positions in the rack cabinet improves rack stability during relocation. Follow these general guidelines whenever you relocate a populated rack cabinet within a room or building: v Reduce the weight of the rack cabinet by removing equipment starting at the top of the rack cabinet. When possible, restore the rack cabinet to the configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it. If this configuration is not known, you must do the following: Remove all devices in the 32U position and above. Ensure that the heaviest devices are installed in the bottom of the rack cabinet. Ensure that there are no empty U-levels between devices installed in the rack cabinet below the 32U level. If the rack cabinet you are relocating is part of a suite of rack cabinets, detach the rack cabinet from the suite. Inspect the route that you plan to take when moving the rack to eliminate potential hazards. Verify that the route that you choose can support the weight of the loaded rack cabinet. Refer to the documentation that came with your rack cabinet for the weight of a loaded rack cabinet. Verify that all door openings are at least 760 x 2030 mm (30 x 80 in.). Ensure that all devices, shelves, drawers, doors, and cables are secure. Ensure that the four leveling pads are raised to their highest position. Ensure that there is no stabilizer bracket installed on the rack cabinet during movement. Do not use a ramp inclined at more than ten degrees. Once the rack cabinet is in the new location, do the following: - Lower the four leveling pads. - Install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet. - If you removed any devices from the rack cabinet, repopulate the rack cabinet from the lowest position to the highest position. If a long distance relocation is required, restore the rack cabinet to the configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it. Pack the rack cabinet in the original packaging material, or equivalent. Also, lower the leveling pads to raise the casters off of the pallet and bolt the rack cabinet to the pallet. For additional information, refer to the documentation for your rack cabinet.
xx
Relocating the rack

The following safety notices apply to the procedures in this section. CAUTION: Make sure that you do the following: v Before you add or remove drawers, always have the leveling feet lowered and the front and rear stabilizer installed, or have the rack bolted to the floor. v Always install drawers at the bottom of the rack first. v Always remove drawers from the top of the rack first. v Always install the heaviest drawers on the bottom of the rack. v Remove two or three drawers from the top of the rack before you relocate it. v Never push on the sides of the rack. Attention: If the rack has equipment located above EIA location 32, you must remove the equipment in position 32 and above from the rack before you move it. Always remove the equipment from the top of the rack first. Complete the following steps before you relocate a rack: 1. Turn off all power to the rack and the system that is installed. 2. Disconnect all power cables. 3. Make sure that the rack is either bolted down or has the stabilizers installed before continuing this procedure. 4. Before removing any drawers from the rack, ensure that the battery LEDs on the controller units are NOT blinking. A blinking LED indicates that the batteries are in use. To ensure that the batteries do not discharge during the relocation process, remove and reseat the battery packs before removing the drawer. Complete the following steps to relocate the rack: 1. Unbolt the rack from the floor or remove the stabilizers. 2. 3. 4. 5. Raise all the leveling feet. Unlock each caster wheel by loosening the screw on the caster. Move the rack to the new position. Reposition the rack.
For additional information, refer to the documentation for your rack cabinet.
Fire suppression systems

A fire suppression system is the responsibility of the customer. The customer's own insurance underwriter, local fire marshal, or a local building inspector, or both, should be consulted in selecting a fire suppression system that provides the correct level of coverage and protection. IBM designs and manufactures equipment to internal and external standards that require certain environments for reliable operation. Because IBM does not test any equipment for compatibility with fire suppression systems, IBM does not make compatibility claims of any kind nor does IBM provide recommendations on fire suppression systems.
Safety notices
xxi
xxii
About this book

This document provides introductory and planning information for the following IBM System Storage N series products: v N3300, N3400, N3600 filers v N3700 filers v N5000 series filers and gateways (N5200, N5300, N5500, and N5600) v v v v N6000 series filers and gateways (N6040, N6060 and N6070) N6200 series filers and gateways (N6210 and N6240) N7000 series filers and gateways (N7700 and N7900) EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN3000, and EXN4000 storage expansion units
Note: This guide applies to systems, including systems with gateway functionality, running Data ONTAP 7.x and Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode. In the Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode product name, the term 7-Mode signifies that the 8.x release has the same features and functionality found in the prior Data ONTAP 7.1, 7.2, and 7.3 release families.
Who should read this document

This guide is for qualified system administrators and service personnel who are familiar with IBM storage systems. This document is for customer use. This document is intended to provide information to customers, operators, administrators, installers, and service personnel.
Supported features
IBM System Storage N series storage systems and storage expansion units are driven by NetApp Data ONTAP software. Some features described in the product software documentation are neither offered nor supported by IBM. Please contact your local IBM representative or reseller for further details. Information about supported features can also be found at the following web site: www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/ A listing of currently available N series products and features can be found at the following web site: www.ibm.com/storage/nas/
How this document is organized

This document contains the following chapters: v Chapter 1, Planning for the IBM N series storage system, on page 1 v Chapter 2, IBM N series hardware features, on page 9 v Chapter 3, IBM N series storage system software features, on page 89 v Chapter 4, Site planning, on page 111 v Chapter 5, Cable planning, on page 163 v Chapter 6, AutoSupport, on page 167 v Appendix A, Recommended power line sizes, on page 169
xxiii
v v v v v v v v
Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 171 Appendix C, Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks, on page 175 Appendix D, Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600, on page 187 Appendix E, Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems, on page 193 Appendix F, Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems, on page 201 Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 211 Appendix H, Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems, on page 221 Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page 229
v Appendix J, Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module, on page 241 v Appendix K, IBM System Storage N series documentation, on page 245
Notices and statements used in this document

The caution and danger statements used in this document also appear in the multilingual IBM Safety Information document. Each caution and danger statement is numbered for easy reference to the corresponding statements in the safety document. The following types of notices and statements are used in this document: v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice. v Important: These notices provide information or advice that might help you avoid inconvenient or problem situations. v Attention: These notices indicate possible damage to programs, devices, or data. An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which damage could occur. v Caution: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous to you. A caution statement is placed just before the description of a potentially hazardous procedure step or situation. v Danger: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to you. A danger statement is placed just before the description of a potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure step or situation.
Getting information, help, and service

If you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more information about IBM products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from IBM to assist you. This section contains information about where to go for additional information about IBM and IBM products, what to do if you experience a problem with your IBM System Storage N series product, and whom to call for service, if it is necessary. The following applies in Taiwan:
xxiv
IBM Taiwan Product Service Contact Info: IBM Taiwan Corporation 3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd., Taipei Taiwan Tel: 0800-016-888
Before you call

Before you call, make sure that you have taken these steps to try to solve the problem yourself: v Check all cables to make sure that they are connected. v Check the power switches to make sure that the system is turned on. v Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation and use the diagnostic tools that come with your system. v Check the IBM support web site for known problems and limitations.
Using the documentation

Information about the N series product and Data ONTAP software is available in printed documents and a documentation CD that comes with your system. The same documentation is available as PDF files on the IBM NAS support web site: www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/
Web sites
IBM maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you can get the latest technical information and download device drivers and updates. v For NAS product information, go to the following web site: www.ibm.com/storage/nas/ v For NAS support information, go to the following web site: www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/ v For AutoSupport information, go to the following web site: www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/ v For the latest version of N series publications, go to the following web site: www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/
Hardware service and support

You can receive hardware service through IBM Integrated Technology Services. Visit the following web site for support telephone numbers: www.ibm.com/planetwide/
About this book
xxv
Supported servers and operating systems

IBM N series products attach to many servers and many operating systems. To determine the latest supported attachments, visit the following web site and access the IBM System Storage N series interoperability matrix: www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html
Firmware updates
As with all devices, it is recommended that you run the latest level of firmware, which is embedded in Data ONTAP. If there are changes, they will be posted to the following web site: www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/ Note: If you do not see new changes on the web site, you are running the latest level of firmware. Verify that the latest level of firmware is installed on your machine before contacting IBM for technical support.
Terminology and conventions used in this document

This guide uses the following terminology, command conventions, format conventions and keyboard conventions. In this document, the term gateway describes IBM N series storage systems that have been ordered with gateway functionality. Gateways support various types of storage, and they are used with third-party disk storage systems. In this case, disk storage for customer data and the RAID controller functionality is provided by the back-end disk storage system. A gateway might also be used with disk storage expansion units specifically designed for the IBM N series models. The term filer describes IBM N series storage systems that either contain internal disk storage or attach to disk storage expansion units specifically designed for the IBM N series storage systems. Filer storage systems do not support using third-party disk storage systems. The following disk storage expansion units are specifically designed for the IBM N series filers: v IBM EXN4000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit v IBM EXN3000 SAS/SATA disk storage expansion unit v IBM EXN2000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit v IBM EXN1000 Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) storage expansion unit The terms system or storage system refer to either a gateway by itself or a filer, either by itself or with additional disk drives.
Active/active and high-availability terms

active/active configuration In the Data ONTAP 7.2 and 7.3 release families, refers to a pair of storage systems (sometimes called nodes) configured to serve data for each other if one of the two systems stops functioning. Also sometimes referred to as active/active pairs.
xxvi
cluster In the Data ONTAP 7.1 release family, refers to a pair of storage systems (sometimes called nodes) configured to serve data for each other if one of the two systems stops functioning. In Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode, a cluster is a group of connected nodes (storage systems) that share a global namespace and that you can manage as a single virtual server or multiple virtual servers, providing performance, reliability, and scalability benefits. HA (high availability) In Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode, the recovery capability provided by a pair of nodes (storage systems), called an HA pair, that are configured to serve data for each other if one of the two nodes stops functioning. HA pair In Data ONTAP 8.x, a pair of nodes (storage systems) configured to serve data for each other if one of the two nodes stops functioning.
Storage terms
AT-FCX The controller module of the EXN1000 serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) storage expansion unit. Disk Any hard disk drive
Disk shelf or shelf Any storage expansion unit containing hard disk drives. ESH2 The controller module of the EXN2000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit. ESH4 The controller module of the EXN4000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit. IOM The Input/Output module of the EXN3000 SAS/SATA disk storage expansion unit.
Loop or Fibre-Channel Arbitrated Loop One or more daisy-chained EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 storage expansion units connected to an N series storage system. Node The system controller module that executes the software on an N series system. There is one node in the C10 and E11 (single-controller) models; there are two nodes in the C20, C21 and E21 (active/active or high availability) models.
Stack or SAS stack a stack of one or more EXN3000 storage expansion units using IOM modules connected to the storage system. The maximum number of storage expansion units in a stack of storage expansion units and the number of storage expansion unit stacks in a configuration are dependent on the type of storage system.
Command conventions
You can enter commands on the system console or from any client that can obtain access to the storage system using a Telnet session. In examples that illustrate commands executed on a UNIX workstation, the command syntax and output might differ, depending on your version of UNIX.
About this book
xxvii
Formatting conventions
The following table lists different character formats used in this guide to set off special information.
Formatting convention Italic type Type of information v Words or characters that require special attention. v Placeholders for information you must supply. For example, if the guide requires you to enter the fctest adaptername command, you enter the characters fctest followed by the actual name of the adapter. v Book titles in cross-references. Monospaced font v Command and daemon names. v Information displayed on the system console or other computer monitors. v The contents of files. Bold monospaced font Words or characters you type. What you type is always shown in lowercase letters, unless your program is case-sensitive and uppercase letters are necessary for it to work properly.
Keyboard conventions
This guide uses capitalization and some abbreviations to refer to the keys on the keyboard. The keys on your keyboard might not be labeled exactly as they are in this guide.
What is in this guide... hyphen (-) What it means... Used to separate individual keys. For example, Ctrl-D means holding down the Ctrl key while pressing the D key. Used to refer to the key that generates a carriage return, although the key is named Return on some keyboards. Used to mean pressing one or more keys on the keyboard. Used to mean pressing one or more keys and then pressing the Enter key.
Enter
type enter
How to send your comments

Your feedback is important in helping us provide the most accurate and high-quality information. If you have comments or suggestions for improving this document, send us your comments by e-mail to starpubs@us.ibm.com. Be sure to include the following: v Exact publication title v Publication form number (for example, GC26-1234-02) v Page, table, or illustration numbers
xxviii
v A detailed description of any information that should be changed
About this book
xxix
xxx
Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system

Successful installation of the IBM System Storage N series storage system requires careful planning. You are the most valuable resource in site planning because you have the most detailed understanding of how the N series storage system and devices attached to it will be used. Site preparation is the responsibility of the customer and this document will provide basic information required to do this preparation. You may want to also enlist the help of your Field Technical Support Specialist, marketing representative, or other support personnel. Your marketing representative is available to ensure that the hardware and software that you have chosen will meet your needs. Planning for the IBM N series storage system consists of these main tasks: 1. Understanding the features and functions of the N series storage system and selecting the proper feature codes (FCs) for your business as described in Chapter 2, IBM N series hardware features, on page 9 and Chapter 3, IBM N series storage system software features, on page 89. 2. Planning for the physical environment where the equipment will operate. This planning step includes the physical space, electrical, temperature, humidity, altitude, air flow, service clearance, and similar requirements as described in Chapter 4, Site planning, on page 111. 3. Planning for cabling depends on the adapter feature codes (FCs) selected as described in Chapter 5, Cable planning, on page 163. 4. If required, planning for a dual-node (active/active or high availability) configuration for as described in High availability or active/active configurations on page 7. 5. Planning for reporting error information to IBM as described in Chapter 6, AutoSupport, on page 167. This chapter also introduces the following topics: v IBM N series storage systems and storage expansion units v Storage expansion unit support on page 2 v v v v v Data ONTAP on page 5 Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL) on page 5 Interoperability on page 6 Adapter support on page 6 High availability or active/active configurations on page 7
IBM N series storage systems and storage expansion units

The following IBM System Storage N series storage systems and storage expansion units are described in Chapter 2, IBM N series hardware features, on page 9. v N3300 hardware features on page 9 v N3400 hardware features on page 13 v N3600 hardware features on page 16 v N3700 hardware features on page 20
v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
N5200 N5200 N5300 N5300 N5500 N5500 N5600 N5600 N6040 N6060 N6070 N6210
filer hardware features on page 23 gateway hardware features on page 28 filer hardware features on page 30 gateway hardware features on page 35 filer hardware features on page 37 gateway hardware features on page 42 filer hardware features on page 45 gateway hardware features on page 50 hardware features on page 52 hardware features on page 57 hardware features on page 61 hardware features on page 66
N6240 hardware features on page 70 N7700 filer hardware features on page 74 N7900 filer hardware features on page 79 EXN1000 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 83 EXN2000 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 85 EXN3000 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 86
v EXN4000 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 87
Storage expansion unit support

There are currently four N series disk storage expansion units specifically designed for IBM N series systems: v IBM EXN4000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit v IBM EXN3000 SAS and SATA disk storage expansion unit (supported for N3400, N3600, N5300, N5600, N6040, N6060, N6070, N7700, and N7900 systems) v IBM EXN2000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit v IBM EXN1000 serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) storage expansion unit Multiple EXN1000s, each having different SATA disk drive feature codes, may be attached to the same N series system on the same Fibre Channel loop. Multiple EXN2000s and EXN4000s, each having different Fibre Channel disk drive feature codes, may be attached to the same N series system on the same Fibre Channel loop. Within an EXN3000, SAS and SATA drives cannot be intermixed; the EXN3000 is either a SAS storage controller or a SATA storage controller. For detailed information about the important differences between EXN3000 and EXN1000/2000/4000 storage expansion units, see the IBM System Storage EXN3000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service Guide. For the latest N series storage expansion unit support information, visit the following web site: www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/
Starting with Data ONTAP 7.3, gateway expands its support matrix to include storage for native disk shelves and native disks. Gateways can now virtualize storage from both third-party storage array venders and native disk shelves. The Data ONTAP software provides a unified storage software platform that simplifies managing both native disk shelves and LUNs on storage arrays. You can add storage when and where you need it, without disruption. See the Gateway Implementation Guide for Native Disk Shelves for additional information about this feature.
Intermixing EXN units

EXN4000s and EXN2000s are both Fibre Channel disk storage expansion units. EXN4000 and EXN2000 storage expansion units can be mixed within the same loop, but the speed switches on all EXN4000s and EXN2000s must be set to the same speed (either 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps). Intermixing Fibre Channel and SATA disk drives in a supported N series system configuration is supported as follows: v Intermixing Fibre Channel disk storage expansion units with SATA disk storage expansion units on the same loop is not supported. v EXN4000s or EXN2000s (Fibre Channel disk drives) and EXN1000s (SATA disk drives) may be attached to the same N series system only if the Fibre Channel disk storage expansion units (EXN4000s or EXN2000s) are on separate loops than the SATA disk storage expansion units (EXN1000s). Note: Intermixing Fibre Channel and SATA disk drives in an N3700 configuration is not supported. IBM N series systems that support SAS HBAs with Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or later also support stacks of EXN3000s as well as Fibre Channel loops of EXN1000s, EXN2000s, and EXN4000s. A single EXN3000 storage expansion unit must contain only SAS disk drives or only SATA disk drives. However, a stack of EXN3000 storage expansion units can contain storage expansion units with SAS disk drives and storage expansion units with SATA disk drives.
Connecting storage expansion units to N series systems

This section describes the requirements for connecting a storage expansion unit to N series systems and other storage expansion units. For detailed instructions about how to install and connect one or more storage expansion units in a rack, or to connect a storage expansion unit to your filer storage system, refer to the Installation and Setup Instructions and the Hardware and Service Guide for your N series controllers and storage expansion units. v IBM strongly recommends using optical (Fibre Channel) cabling whenever possible. v Refer to Chapter 2, IBM N series hardware features, on page 9 for details about the maximum number of drive loops, maximum number of storage expansion units or hard disk drives per loop, maximum total storage capacity, and maximum total number of hard disk drives for configurations using your N series system. v Multipath looping is recommended for all configurations to provide additional redundancy. This includes single or dual controller and single or multiple storage expansion units. v Do not mix Fibre Channel EXN2000s/EXN4000s and SATA EXN1000 storage expansion units in the same loop.
v EXN4000 and EXN2000 storage expansion units can be mixed within the same loop, but the speed switches on all EXN4000s and EXN2000s must be set to the same speed (either 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps). v For detailed information about the important differences between EXN3000 and EXN1000/2000/4000 storage expansion units, see the IBM System Storage EXN3000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service Guide. Note: One optical cable feature code order provides two cables. One SFP feature code order provides two SFPs.
Storage expansion unit cabling requirements

You must meet the cabling requirements discussed in the following sections when connecting the storage expansion unit to an N series system or to other storage expansion units. For the latest information on cabling requirements, see Installation and Setup Instructions and the Hardware and Service Guide for your storage system. Connecting the storage expansion unit to the N series system: For EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000: When connecting EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000 storage expansion units to an N series system, you must use appropriate cables and connectors according to the following guidelines. v For direct connections to N3700 storage systems with early CPU module designs: Use a NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cable (#2020 or 2022). For attachment to an N3700 Model A10, one NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cable is required. For attachment to an N3700 Model A20, two NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cables are required. v For direct connections to N3700 storage systems with current CPU module designs: Use an LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cable and two SFPs for attachment to an N3700 Model A10. Use two LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cables and four SFPs for attachment to an N3700 Model A20. v For direct connections to all other N series systems: Use LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cables and SFPs. Note: For information about the differences between early and late CPU module designs, see Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU modules on page 21. For EXN3000: For information about cabling EXN3000s, see the IBM System Storage EXN3000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service Guide. Connecting the storage expansion unit to other storage expansion units: For EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000: When connecting a storage expansion unit to other storage expansion units, IBM strongly recommends using two LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cables and four SFPs (two SFPs per LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cable). Note: SFP-to-SFP Fibre Channel copper cables may also be used for connections (to a maximum of three meters) between storage expansion units.
You must order one cable feature code and two SFP feature codes per storage expansion unit. For EXN3000: Connections between EXN3000s are made using SAS cables. For information about cabling EXN3000s, see the IBM System Storage EXN3000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service Guide.
Connecting a gateway to external storage

You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre Channel SAN. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices for your gateway system. www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.
Data ONTAP
N series storage systems are driven by the Data ONTAP operating system. Data ONTAP is a highly optimized, scalable, and flexible operating system that can handle mixed SAN and NAS environments. Data ONTAP delivers flexible management and high availability, ensures business continuance, and provides data permanence, thereby reducing storage management complexity in your enterprise. Data ONTAP software integrates seamlessly into UNIX, Windows, and web environments and provides the foundation to build your storage infrastructure and an enterprise-wide data fabric for mission-critical business applications. The operating system includes integrated secure access capabilities (SSL, SSH) and FilerView, a web-based element manager. The innovative Data ONTAP architecture delivers scalable performance and a flexible storage environment, that can be applied in many environments ranging from small workgroups to enterprise data centers. Data ONTAP stores and serves applications, consolidates data, and provides reliable data access throughout the enterprise. The Data ONTAP operating system simplifies management and optimizes storage utilization by combining file-system technology and a microkernel design, enabling such features as flexible data management, scalability, and heterogeneous access.
Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL)

The WAFL (Write Anywhere File Layout) file system contributes to a high level of data availability while providing dynamic and flexible data storage containers using Flexible Volume technology as well as data protection using integrated, nonvolatile RAM and a block-level checksum capability. The WAFL file system is designed specifically to work in an NFS appliance. The primary focus is on the algorithms and data structures that WAFL uses to implement Snapshots, which are read-only clones of the active file system. WAFL uses a copy-on-write technique to minimize the disk space that Snapshots consume.
Interoperability
The latest information on software and hardware interoperability can be accessed at: www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html
Adapter support
Most IBM System Storage N series controller models feature PCI adapter slots. Adapters must be added in pairs, one per node, to dual-controller models, so that both nodes are populated with the same number of each type of PCI adapters. There are no PCI adapter slots on the N3300, N3400 and N3700 systems. No additional adapter options are supported for the N3300, N3400 and N3700 systems. There is one available PCIe adapter slot per node on the N3600 storage system. The PCIe adapters supported by the N3600 are described in Appendix D, Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600, on page 187. There are three available PCI-X adapter slots per node on the N5200 and N5500 storage systems. (A10/G10 models have three available PCI-X adapter slots. A20/G20 models have six available PCI-X adapter slots.) The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems are described in Appendix E, Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems, on page 193. There are three available PCIe adapter slots per node on the N5300 and N5600 storage systems. (A10/G10 models have three available PCIe adapter slots. A20/G20 models have six available PCIe adapter slots.) The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are described in Appendix F, Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems, on page 201. There are five available PCIe adapter slots and three available PCI-X adapter slots per node on the N7700 and N7900 storage systems. (The sixth PCIe adapter slot on each N7700 or N7900 node is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter and is not available for PCIe adapter card use). The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage systems are described in Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page 229. There are three PCIe X8 expansion slots and one PCIe X4 expansion slot per node on the N6000 series storage systems. The PCIe adapters supported by the N6000 series storage systems are described in Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 211. There are two PCIe expansion slots per controller node on the N6200 series storage systems. N6240 Exx models also contain an I/O expansion module per controller node that provides additional PCIe slots. The I/O expansion is not available on N6210 Cxx models. The PCIe adapters supported by the N6200 series storage systems are described in Appendix H, Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems, on page 221.
High availability or active/active configurations

Before beginning hardware planning, decide if the higher availability obtained by clustering two N series storage system nodes is needed. These higher availability configurations are referred to as HA (high availability) pairs in Data ONTAP 8.0, as active/active configurations in Data ONTAP 7.2 and 7.3, and as clustered configurations in Data ONTAP 7.1. An HA pair (or active/active configuration) consists of two storage systems (nodes) whose controllers are connected to each other either directly or, in the case of a fabric-attached MetroCluster, through switches and FC-VI interconnect adapters. You can configure the HA pair so that each node in the pair shares access to a common set of storage, subnets, and tape drives, or each node can own its own distinct set of storage. The nodes are connected to each other through a NVRAM adapter, or, in the case of systems with two controllers in a single chassis, through an internal interconnect. This allows one node to serve data that resides on the disks of its failed partner node. Each node continually monitors its partner, mirroring the data for each others nonvolatile memory (NVRAM or NVMEM). Two N series storage system nodes can be clustered together for higher availability using the Cluster Failover (CFO) software feature. The IBM N3300, N3400, N3600, N3700, and N6000 series systems all contain both clustered (active/active or high availability) nodes in the same enclosure. Dual-controller IBM N6200 series models that do not include Input/Output expansion modules contain both nodes in the same enclosure. Dual-controller IBM N6200 series models that do include Input/Output expansion modules contain controller nodes in separate enclosures. In all IBM N5000 and N7000 series models, a standard active/active or high availability configuration contains two nodes, with each node contained in a different enclosure. Both nodes must be the same N series model. The two nodes are clustered through an Infiniband (IB) cluster cable that is attached to the NVRAM5 adapter (for N5200 and N5500 models) or NVRAM6 adapter (for N5300, N5600 and N7000 series models), which allows one node to serve data to the disks of its failed partner node. Configuring storage systems in an HA pair (or active/active configuration) provides the following benefits: v Fault tolerance When one node fails or becomes impaired, a takeover occurs, and the partner node continues to serve the failed nodes data. v Nondisruptive software upgrades When you halt one node and allow takeover, the partner node continues to serve data for the halted node while you upgrade the node you halted. For more information about nondisruptive upgrades, see the IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP Upgrade Guide for your version of Data ONTAP. v Nondisruptive storage system and disk maintenance When you halt one node and allow takeover, the partner node continues to serve data for the halted node while you replace or repair hardware in the node you halted.
More information about active/active or high availability configurations is provided in the following documents: v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 High Availability Configuration Guide v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Active/Active Configuration Guide v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Active/Active Configuration Guide v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Cluster Installation and Administration Guide v IBM System Storage N series MetroCluster Redbook, REDP-4243-00
Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features

This chapter describes the hardware features for the following N series products. v N3300 hardware features v N3400 hardware features on page 13 v N3600 hardware features on page 16 v N3700 hardware features on page 20 v v v v v v v v v v v v N5200 N5200 N5300 N5300 N5500 N5500 N5600 N6040 N6060 N6070 N6210 N6240 filer hardware features on page 23 gateway hardware features on page 28 filer hardware features on page 30 gateway hardware features on page 35 filer hardware features on page 37 gateway hardware features on page 42 filer hardware features on page 45 hardware hardware hardware hardware hardware features features features features features on on on on on page page page page page 52 57 61 66 70
v N5600 gateway hardware features on page 50
v N7700 filer hardware features on page 74 v N7900 filer hardware features on page 79 v EXN1000 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 83 v EXN2000 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 85 v EXN3000 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 86 v EXN4000 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 87 This chapter also provides rack mounting information in Rack mount requirements on page 88.
N3300 hardware features

The IBM System Storage N3300 storage controller includes the Model A10, a single-node base unit, and the Model A20, an active/active dual-node base unit. Both models are designed to provide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocol support, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements. The N3300 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N3300 interoperability is available at: www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N3300 A10
The N3300 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with iSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N3300 Model A10 is a 2U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The base chassis includes: v One 2.2 GHz 32-bit processor v 1 GB random access ECC memory v v v v v v Two integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Two integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel ports One serial console port One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Support for 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives
The N3300 Model A10 may be upgraded to an N3300 Model A20. The upgrade from a Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.
N3300 A20
The N3300 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N3300 Model A10, but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) and the Clustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The Model A20 consists of two PCMs that are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. The Model A20 is a 2U rack-mountable storage controller. The N3300 Model A20 includes: v v v v v Two 2.2 GHz 32-bit processors 2 GB random access ECC memory Four integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Four integrated 4-Gbps SFF Fibre Channel ports Two serial console ports
v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports v Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans v Support for 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives
Connecting storage expansion units to the N3300

The N3300 storage controller supports both the EXN1000 Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) storage expansion unit, and the EXN2000 and EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. The maximum number of storage expansion units that may be attached to either the Model A10 or A20 is four. Note: The N3300 does not support attachment of EXN3000 storage expansion units. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit provides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities.
10
The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units provide a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk drives. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel disk drive speeds and capacities: v 15,000 revolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB and 600 GB capacities v 10,000 revolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities Each storage expansion unit contains a maximum of 14 disk drives, all of a particular type (rotational speed and capacity). For the initial order of the IBM System Storage N3300, you may not include storage expansion units containing more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives. Table 1 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N3300 Model A10 and Model A20.
Table 1. N3300 raw storage capacity Disk drive capacity 144 GB SAS disk drives 300 GB SAS disk drives 450 GB SAS disk drives 600 GB SAS disk drives 500 GB SATA disk drives 750 GB SATA disk drives 1 TB SATA disk drives 2 TB SATA disk drives 250 GB SATA disk drives 750 GB SATA disk drives 1 TB SATA disk drives 2 TB SATA disk drives 144 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 300 GB Fibre Channel disk drives Maximum storage enclosures n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 4 4 4 4 4 Maximum disk drives 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 56 56 56 28 56 Maximum physical capacity1 1.72 TB 3.60 TB 5.40 TB 7.20 TB 6 TB 9 TB 12 TB 24 TB 14 TB 42 TB 56 TB 56 TB 8.06 TB
Disk enclosure Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN2000
EXN2000
56
16.8 TB
11
Table 1. N3300 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk drive capacity 144 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 300 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 450 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 600 GB Fibre Channel disk drives Maximum storage enclosures 4 Maximum disk drives 56 Maximum physical capacity1 8.06 TB
Disk enclosure EXN4000
EXN4000
56
16.8 TB
EXN4000
56
25.2 TB
EXN4000
56
33.6 TB
The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3300 system is determined by the maximum number of disk drives supported (68, including 12 internal drives and 56 drives in storage expansion units) and a maximum physical storage limit of 68 TB. Both limits must be honored.
EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN2000 or EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units.
N3300 feature codes

Table 2. N3300 feature codes Description Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 4-Gbps SFP GBIC 144 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 300 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 450 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 600 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 500 GB SATA HDD 750 GB SATA HDD 1 TB SATA HDD 2 TB SATA HDD HDD Blank Panel Machine 2859 2859 2859 2859 2859 2859 2859 2859 2859 2859 2859 2859 Model A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 Feature 1044 1051 2011 4014 4015 4016 4017 4018 4019 4020 4021 4099
Table 3. N3300 installation features codes Description Field install rack mount kit Machine 2859 Model A10, A20 Feature 9202
The power cord features for the N3300 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 171.
12

The IBM System Storage N3400 storage controller includes the Model A11, a single-node base unit, and the Model A21, an active/active (or high availability) dual-node base unit. The two models of the N3400 are designed to provide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocol support, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements. Additional functions, such as snapshot, mirroring, and business continuance capability, are available through optional licensed functions. The N3400 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N3400 interoperability is available at: www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N3400 A11
The N3400 Model A11 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with iSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N3400 Model A11 is a 2U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The base chassis includes: v Two 1.66 GHz Intel dual-core Xeon LV processors v 8 GB random access ECC memory v Four integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports v Two integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel ports v v v v v One SAS port - Quad Small Form Factor Pluggable (QSFP) One serial console port Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Support for 6 to 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives
The N3400 Model A11 may be upgraded to an N3400 Model A21. The upgrade from a Model A11 to a Model A21 is a disruptive upgrade.
N3400 A21
The N3400 Model A21 is designed to provide identical function as the N3400 Model A11, but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) and the Clustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The Model A21 consists of two PCMs that are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. The Model A21 is a 2U rack-mountable storage controller. The N3400 Model A21 includes: v v v v Four 1.66 GHz Intel dual-core Xeon LV processors 16 GB random access ECC memory Eight integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Four integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel ports
13
v v v v v
Two SAS ports -- Quad Small Form Factor Pluggable (QSFP) Two serial console ports Four integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Support for 6 to 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

The N3400 storage controller Models A11 and A21 can attach a maximum of eight Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) or Fibre Channel storage expansion units, either EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000. The maximum number of EXN3000 SAS/SATA storage expansion units that can be attached is four. On the initial order of an N3400, either SAS-attached or Fibre Channel-attached expansion units may be ordered, not both. For an initial order, no more than six Fibre Channel-attached expansion units may be ordered. Both N3400 models support either one backend FC loop (for EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 storage expansion units) or one SAS stack (for EXN3000 storage expansion units). The EXN1000 storage expansion unit is a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN2000 and EXN4000 FC storage expansion units. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units are 3U rack-mountable disk enclosures containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk drives. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel disk drive speeds and capacities: v 15,000 revolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB capacities v 10,000 revolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing 5, and up to a maximum of 24, SAS or SATA disk drives. The supported disk drives are: v SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacities v SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB and 2 TB physical capacities Each storage expansion unit contains a maximum of 14 (24 for SAS) disk drives, all of a particular type (rotational speed and capacity). For the initial order of the IBM System Storage N3300, you may not include storage expansion units containing more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives. Table 4 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N3400 Model A11 and Model A21.
Table 4. N3400 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure Internal Internal Maximum storage enclosures n/a n/a Maximum disk drives 12 12 Maximum physical capacity1 3.60 TB 5.40 TB
Disk drive capacity 300 GB SAS disk drives 450 GB SAS disk drives
14
Table 4. N3400 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure Internal Internal Internal Internal EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 Maximum storage enclosures n/a n/a n/a n/a 8 8 8 8 8 Maximum disk drives 12 12 12 12 112 112 112 112 56 Maximum physical capacity1 7.20 TB 6 TB 12 TB 24 TB 28 TB 56 TB 84 TB 112 TB 136 TB
Disk drive capacity 600 GB SAS disk drives 500 GB SATA disk drives 1 TB SATA disk drives 2 TB SATA disk drives 250 GB SATA disk drives 500 GB SATA disk drives 750 GB SATA disk drives 1 TB SATA disk drives 2 TB SATA disk drives In a system running Data ONTAP 7.3.x In a system running Data ONTAP 8.0.x
112
272 TB
EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000
300 GB SAS disk drives 450 GB SAS disk drives 600 GB SAS disk drives 500 GB SATA disk drives 1 TB SATA disk drives 2 TB SATA disk drives In a system running Data ONTAP 7.3.x In a system running Data ONTAP 8.0.x
4 4 4 4 4 4
96 96 96 96 96 48
28.80 TB 43.20 TB 57.60 TB 48 TB 96 TB 136 TB
96
272 TB
EXN4000 and 144 GB Fibre Channel disk EXN2000 drives EXN4000 and 300 GB Fibre Channel disk EXN2000 drives EXN4000 EXN4000
1
8 8 8 8
112 112 112 112
16.12 TB 33.60 TB 50.40 TB 67.20 TB
450 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 600 GB Fibre Channel disk drives
The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3400 system is determined by the maximum number of disk drives supported (136) and a maximum physical storage limit of 136 TB. Both limits must be honored.
N3400 feature codes

Table 5. N3400 feature codes Description Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC Machine 2859 Model A11, A21 Feature 1044
15
Table 5. N3400 feature codes (continued) Description 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 4-Gbps SFP GBIC 144 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 300 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 450 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 600 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 500 GB SATA HDD 750 GB SATA HDD 1 TB SATA HDD 2 TB SATA HDD HDD Blank Panel Machine 2859 2859 2859 2859 2859 2859 2859 2859 2859 2859 2859 Model A11, A21 A11, A21 A11, A21 A11, A21 A11, A21 A11, A21 A11, A21 A11, A21 A11, A21 A11, A21 A11, A21 Feature 1051 2011 4014 4015 4016 4017 4018 4019 4020 4021 4099

The IBM System Storage N3600 storage controller includes the Model A10, a single-node base unit, and the Model A20, an active/active dual-node base unit. Both models are designed to provide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocol support, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements. The N3600 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N3600 interoperability is available at: www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N3600 A10
The Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with iSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N3600 Model A10 is a 4U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The base chassis includes: v One 2.2 GHz 32-bit processor v 2 GB random access ECC memory v Two integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports
16
v v v v v
Two integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel ports One serial console port One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Support for 20 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives
The Model A10 supports a maximum of one dual-path Fibre Channel loop or SAS stack. The Model A10 can be up upgraded to a maximum of 4 gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of one optional dual-port Ethernet NIC (feature number 1012 or 1013). The Model A10 may be upgraded to a Model A20. The upgrade from a Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.
N3600 A20
The Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N3600 Model A10, but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) and the Clustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The Model A20 also supports a maximum of 104 drives. The Model A20 consists of two PCMs that are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. The Model A20 is a 4U rack-mountable storage controller. The Model A20 includes: v Two 2.2 GHz 32-bit processors v v v v v v 4 GB random access ECC memory Four integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Four integrated 4-Gbps SFF Fibre Channel ports Two PCIe expansion slots Two serial console ports Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports
v Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans v Support for 20 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives For the Model A20, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters is two (one per node). The Model A20 supports a maximum of one dual-path Fibre Channel loop or SAS stack. The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of eight gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of two optional dual-port gigabit Ethernet NIC (feature number 1012 or 1013).

The EXN1000 storage expansion unit is a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN2000 and EXN4000 FC storage expansion units.
17
Note: EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN2000 or EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units are 3U rack-mountable disk enclosures containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk drives. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel disk drive speeds and capacities: v 15,000 revolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB capacities v 10,000 revolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing 5, and up to a maximum of 24, SAS or SATA disk drives. The supported disk drives are: v SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacities v SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB and 2 TB physical capacities For the initial order of the N3600, you may not include storage expansion units containing more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives. Table 7 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N3600 Model A10 and Model A20.
Table 7. N3600 raw storage capacity Disk drive capacity 144 GB SAS disk drives 300 GB SAS disk drives 450 GB SAS disk drives 600 GB SAS disk drives 500 GB SATA disk drives 750 GB SATA disk drives 1 TB SATA disk drives 250 GB SATA disk drives 500 GB SATA disk drives 750 GB SATA disk drives 1 TB SATA disk drives 2 TB SATA disk drives Maximum storage enclosures n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 6 6 6 6 6 Maximum disk drives 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 84 84 84 84 42 Maximum physical capacity1 2.88 TB 6.00 TB 9.00 TB 12 TB 10 TB 15 TB 20 TB 21.00 TB 42.00 TB 63.00 TB 84 TB 84 TB
Disk enclosure Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000
18
Table 7. N3600 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk drive capacity 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 600 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives 2 TB SATA disk drives 144 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 300 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 450 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 600 GB Fibre Channel disk drives Maximum storage enclosures 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Maximum disk drives 84 84 84 84 84 42 84 Maximum physical capacity1 25.20 TB 37.80 TB 50.4 TB 42.00 TB 84 TB 84 TB 12.09 TB
Disk enclosure EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN4000 and EXN2000 EXN4000 and EXN2000 EXN4000
84
25.20 TB
84
37.80 TB
EXN4000
84
50.4 TB
1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3600 Model A10 and Model A20 is determined by the maximum number of disk drives supported (104, 20 internal and 84 via storage expansion units) and a maximum physical storage limit of 104 TB. Both limits must be honored.
N3600 feature codes

The following table lists the feature codes for N3600 cables, connectors, and hard disk drives. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N3600, see Appendix D, Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600, on page 187.
Table 8. N3600 feature codes Description Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 3m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable Machine 2862 2862 2862 2862 2862 Model A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 Feature 1044 1051 1053 1054 1055 1071 1072
FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 1 2862 m FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 3 2862 m
19
Table 8. N3600 feature codes (continued) Description Machine Model A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 Feature 1073 2011 4014 4015 4016 4017 4018 4019 4020 4099
FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 5 2862 m 4-Gbps SFP GBIC 144 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 300 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 450 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 600 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 500 GB SATA HDD 750 GB SATA HDD 1 TB SATA HDD HDD Blank Panel 2862 2862 2862 2862 2862 2862 2862 2862 2862

The N3700 consists of the Model A10 or Model A20, and its associated software. The Model A10 is designed to provide a single node filer with NFS, CIFS, iSCSI and FCP support in a 3U, integrated filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. This base chassis includes redundant hot-plug power supplies with fans and two integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports. The N3700 Model A10 is capable of being upgraded to an N3700 Model A20. The Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N3700 Model A10, but with the addition of the Clustered Failover (CFO) software feature. The N3700 Model A20 consists of two processing nodes in the same enclosure that are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall reliability. The N3700 can be configured with as few as four disk drives in the Model A10 and eight in the Model A20, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (28 disk drives in the A20). Disk drive types include 72 GB (10,000 or 15,000 RPM), 144 GB (10,000 or 15,000 RPM), and 300 GB (10,000 RPM). Within any single N3700, all disk drives must be of the same type. Note: Any N3700 drive bays that do not contain hard disk drives must be populated with drive blank covers (feature 4099) covering the remaining drive bays. The N3700 load board feature enables the N3700 (A10 and A20) to operate in a SATA-only storage environment. If the N3700 load board is ordered, the N3700 is ordered with no Fibre Channel hard drives and only EXN1000s (SATA drives) are
20
attached to the storage controller. For more information about the N3700 load board, see Connecting storage expansion units to the N3700 on page 22. Attention: If your N3700 storage system shipped with load boards, exactly two N3700 load boards (FC 4020) and 12 HDD blank fillers (FC 4099) are installed in the system. The two load boards must be installed in bays 0 and 1. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU modules
N3700 storage systems with system serial numbers between 13-00001 and 13-01000 shipped with an early CPU module design. (In general, these are N3700 systems that shipped prior to January 31, 2006.) Current N3700 systems (with system serial numbers 13-01001 and higher) ship with the current CPU module design, which uses different Fibre Channel connectors. (In general, these are N3700 systems that shipped after January 31, 2006.) Regardless of the CPU module design, all N3700 storage systems offer the same functionality. Field repairs or upgrades may use the current CPU module design on any N3700 system. The early CPU module is easily distinguished from the current CPU module design by the rear port labeling, shown in Figure 2. The early CPU module uses an integrated SFP for Fibre Channel Port C (used for third-party devices), and it uses a special HSS connector for Fibre Channel Port B to connect the N3700 to storage expansion units.
Figure 2. Port labeling for early N3700 CPU module designs
The current CPU module design uses pluggable SFP connections for both Fibre Channel ports. The current CPU module labeling is shown in Figure 3 on page 22. The SFP required for connections to the Fibre Channel Port C (used for third-party devices) is included with all N3700s that ship with the current CPU module design. For Port B (used for connections to storage expansion units), an SFP is required only for connections using optical cables (recommended). The SFP for Port B is shipped with the cables ordered with your storage expansion unit.
21
Figure 3. Port labeling for current N3700 CPU module designs
Attention: Depending on the design of your N3700 CPU module, direct connections to storage expansion units must be made with either Fibre Channel copper cables or Fibre Channel optical cables, as described in the following bullets: v For direct connections to N3700 early CPU module designs: Use NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cables (FC 2020 or 2022). For attachment to an N3700 Model A10, one NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cable is required. For attachment to an N3700 Model A20, two NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cables are required. v For direct connections to N3700 current CPU module designs: Use an LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cable and two SFPs for attachment to an N3700 Model A10. Use two LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cables and four SFPs for attachment to an N3700 Model A20.

Physical capacity of the N3700 can be scaled up to 16.8 TB with the attachment of up to three IBM System Storage N series EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 storage expansion units. An N3700 storage system configuration supports a maximum of 56 disk drives (including the possible fourteen disk drives in the N3700). The maximum raw physical storage capacity of 16.8 TB includes the capacity of any internal drives in the N3700. Note: The N3700 does not support attachment of EXN3000 storage expansion units. v EXN4000 storage expansion units can be configured with as few as four disk drives, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk drives of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB or 600 GB physical capacity. v EXN2000 storage expansion units can be configured with as few as four disk drives, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk drives of 72 GB, 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB or 600 GB physical capacity. v EXN1000 storage expansion units can be configured with a minimum of five, up to a maximum of 14, SATA disk drives of the same capacity. SATA disk drives are available in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, and 1 TB capacities. Note: Any storage expansion unit drive bays that do not contain hard disk drives must be populated with drive blank covers (feature 4099) covering the remaining drive bays. The N3700 does not support the attachment of mixed storage expansion unit types. All storage expansion units connected to a single N3700 must be either EXN4000s, EXN2000s or EXN1000s.
22
Attention: Depending on the CPU module design of your N3700 storage system, direct connections to storage expansion units must be made with either Fibre Channel copper cables or Fibre Channel optical cables, as described in Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU modules on page 21. If you are attaching EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units to the N3700, the N3700 base unit must either: v have the minimum number of Fibre Channel disk drives installed (four for a Model A10 and eight for a Model A20); or v have two N3700 load boards (FC 4020) and 12 HDD blank fillers (FC 4099) In the case where the objective is to have as much low cost SATA storage as possible, the N3700 can be configured with no Fibre Channel disk drives. In order to configure the N3700 system (the base unit and storage expansion units) with no Fibre Channel disk drives, you must order two HDD load boards (FC 4020) and 12 HDD blank fillers (FC 4099).
N3700 feature codes

Table 10. N3700 feature codes Description 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 72 GB, 10K RPM Fibre Channel HDD 72 GB, 15K RPM Fibre Channel HDD 144 GB, 10K RPM Fibre Channel HDD 144 GB, 15K RPM Fibre Channel HDD 300 GB, 10K RPM Fibre Channel HDD N3700 load board Drive Blank Cover Machine 2863 2863 2863 2863 2863 2863 2863 2863 Model A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 Feature 1051 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4020 4099
The power cord features for the N3700 filer are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 171.
N5200 filer hardware features

The IBM System Storage N5200 filers consist of the Model A10 and Model A20, and associated software. The N5200 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These
23
include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5200 interoperability is available at: www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N5200 A10
The N5200 Model A10 is designed to provide a single node filer with NFS, CIFS, FCP and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N5200 Model A10 does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis includes: v One Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processor v 2 GB of ECC memory v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports v Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or initiators v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans v Redundant cooling fans v Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs) v Front LCD message display For the N5200 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is three. Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems are described in Appendix E, Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems, on page 193. The Model A10 can have a maximum of four dual-path (redundant) Fibre Channel storage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000). On the Model A10, in order to have the maximum number of dual-path Fibre Channel storage loops, two additional dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004) are needed. The four onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured as FCP targets, then more than two dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004) are required to reach the maximum of four dual-path Fibre Channel storage loops for disk storage expansion units. The Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports via the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).
24
The Model A10 may be upgraded to a Model A20. The upgrade from a Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.
N5200 A20
The N5200 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5200 Model A10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO) software feature. The Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer. Therefore, the Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space. The N5200 Model A20 includes: v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, one per node v 4 GB of ECC memory, 2 GB per node v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per node v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per node v Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can be configured as targets or initiators v Four redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans, two per node v Redundant cooling fans v Six PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per node (always ordered and installed in pairs) v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM5 adapter, between the two processing N5000 nodes v Front LCD message display For the N5200 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is six. Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems are described in Appendix E, Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems, on page 193. The Model A20 can have a maximum of eight dual-path (redundant) Fibre Channel storage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000). On the Model A20, in order to have the maximum number of dual-path Fibre Channel storage loops, four additional dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004), two per node, are needed. The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured as FCP targets, then more than four dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004) are required to reach the maximum of eight dual-path Fibre Channel storage loops for disk storage expansion units. The N5200 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).
25
The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A20 (with respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.
Connecting storage expansion units to the N5200 filer

The N5200 filer Models A10 and A20 require at least one storage expansion unit per node, either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000. Note: The N5200 does not support attachment of EXN3000 storage expansion units. Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional storage expansion units do not have to meet this requirement. Table 12 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for both the N5200.
Table 12. N5200 filer raw storage capacity Disk drive capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk drives 168 168 168 168 168 84 168 Maximum physical capacity1 42 TB 53.76 TB 84 TB 126 TB 168 TB 168 TB 12.09 TB
Disk enclosure EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN2000
250 GB SATA disk 12 drives 320 GB SATA disk 12 drives 500 GB SATA disk 12 drives 750 GB SATA disk 12 drives 1 TB SATA disk drives 2 TB SATA disk drives 72 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 144 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 300 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 144 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 300 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 12 12 12
EXN2000
12
168
24.19 TB
EXN2000
12
168
50.40 TB
EXN4000
12
168
24.19 TB
EXN4000
12
168
50.40 TB
26
Table 12. N5200 filer raw storage capacity (continued) Disk drive capacity 450 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 600 GB Fibre Channel disk drives Maximum storage enclosures 12 Maximum disk drives 168 Maximum physical capacity1 75.60 TB
EXN4000
12
168
100.80 TB
The maximum raw storage capacity of the N5200 system is determined by the maximum number of disk drives supported (168) and a maximum physical storage limit of 168 TB. Both limits must be honored.
EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N5200 filer. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.
N5200 filer feature codes

The following table lists the feature codes for N5200 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5200, see Appendix E, Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems, on page 193.
Table 13. N5200 filer feature codes Description 2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable Copper-Fiber Converter Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernet cable Machine 2864 2864 2864 2864 2864 2864 A20 A20 A20 A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A20 A10, A20 Model Feature 1037 1040 1041 1042 1044 1047 1050 1051
Extended long-wave SFP (4-Gbps) 2864 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 2864
Table 14. N5200 filer installation features codes Description Field install rack mount kit Machine 2864 Model A10, A20 Feature 9202
27
N5200 gateway hardware features

The IBM System Storage N5200 gateways consist of the Model G10 and Model G20, and associated software. The N5200 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5200 interoperability is available at: www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html Mixed disk/LUN support is available on N series gateway systems. This support requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher and enables the use of both third-party disks and N series storage expansion units on N series gateways. This support also enables SnapLock Compliance, LockVault Compliance, and Disk Sanitization on gateways when used with N series storage only. These features are not be supported on third-party storage devices. Note: The N5200 does not support attachment of EXN3000 storage expansion units. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N5200 G10
The N5200 Model G10 is designed to provide a single node gateway with NFS, CIFS, FCP and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N5200 Model G10 gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis includes: v One Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processor v 2 GB of ECC memory v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports v Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or initiators v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans v Redundant cooling fans v Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs) v Front LCD message display For the N5200 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is three. Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems are described in Appendix E, Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems, on page 193.
28
The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP initiators for attaching to SAN storage or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN). The Model G10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports via the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).
N5200 G20
The N5200 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5200 Model G10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO) software feature. The Model G20 consists of two processing nodes that are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable gateway. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space. The N5200 Model G20 includes: v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, one per node v 4 GB of ECC memory, 2 GB per node v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per node v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per node v Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can be configured as targets or initiators v Four redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans, two per node v Redundant cooling fans v Six PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per node (always ordered and installed in pairs) v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM5 adapter, between the two processing N5000 nodes v Front LCD message display For the N5200 Model G20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is six. Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems are described in Appendix E, Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems, on page 193. The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP initiators for attaching to SAN storage or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN). The Model G20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007). The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G20 (with respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables
29
are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre Channel SAN. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices for your N5000 series gateway. www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.
N5200 gateway feature codes

Table 15. N5200 gateway feature codes Description 2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable Copper-Fiber Converter 30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernet cable 4-Gbps Extended Long-wave SFP 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) Machine 2864 2864 2864 2864 2864 2864 2864 G20 G20 G20 G20 G10, G20 G20 G10, G20 Model Feature 1037 1040 1041 1042 1047 1050 1051
Table 16. N5200 gateway installation features codes Description Field install rack mount kit Machine 2864 Model G10, G20 Feature 9202
The power cord features for the N5200 gateway are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 171.

The IBM System Storage N5300 filers consist of the Model A10 or Model A20, and associated software. The N5300 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5300 interoperability is available at: www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html
30
For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N5300 A10
The N5300 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node filer with NFS, CIFS, FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N5300 Model A10 does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This base chassis includes: v Two 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors v 4 GB of ECC memory v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports v Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or initiators v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans v Redundant cooling fans v Three PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs) v One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port v One serial console port v Front LCD message display All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For the N5300 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is three. A fourth expansion slot is used for the standard (included with the N5300) 512 MB NVRAM adapter card. Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 storage system are described in Appendix F, Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems, on page 201. The Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of five dual-path Fibre Channel loops (10 Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of three optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature number 1014). The five loops will support a maximum of 252 total disk drives. The Model A10 can be up upgraded to a maximum of 16 gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of three optional quad-port copper NICs (feature number 1023). The Model A10 may be upgraded to an N5300 Model A20. The upgrade from a Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade. Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 or N5500 storage system to an N5300 storage system.
N5300 A20
The N5300 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model A10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO) software feature. The Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that are designed to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overall
31
availability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer. Therefore, the N5300 Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space. The N5300 Model A20 includes: v Four 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors v 8 GB of DDR-400 ECC memory v 1 GB (512 MB per node) of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or initiators v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans v Redundant cooling fans v Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs) v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports v Two serial console ports v Front LCD message display All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For the N5300 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is six. Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 storage system are described in Appendix F, Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems, on page 201. The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path Fibre Channel loops (20 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of six optional Fibre Channel HBA for Disk Attachments (feature number 1014). The ten loops will support a maximum of 252 total disk drives. The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 32 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional quad-port copper gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1023). The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A20 (with respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Both N5300 filer models require the addition of at least one N series storage expansion unit. Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional storage expansion units do not have to meet this requirement. Table 17 on page 33 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N5300.
32
Table 17. N5300 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 Maximum storage enclosures 24 24 24 24 24 Maximum disk drives 336 336 336 336 168 Maximum physical capacity1 84 TB 168 TB 252 TB 336 TB 336 TB
Disk drive capacity 250 GB SATA disk drives 500 GB SATA disk drives 750 GB SATA disk drives 1 TB SATA disk drives 2 TB SATA disk drives In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x
24
336
672 TB
300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 600 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives 2 TB SATA disk drives In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x
24 24 24 24 24 24
336 336 336 336 336 168
100.8 TB 151.2 TB 201.6 TB 168 TB 336 TB 336 TB
24
336
672 TB
EXN4000 and EXN2000 EXN4000 and EXN2000 EXN4000 EXN4000

1
144 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 300 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 450 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 600 GB Fibre Channel disk drives
24
336
48.384 TB
24
336
100.8 TB
24 24
336 336
151.2 TB 201.6 TB
The maximum raw storage capacity of the N5300 is determined by the maximum number of disk drives supported (336) and a maximum physical storage limit of 336 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 672 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x. Both limits must be honored.
EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. An EXN3000 SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported EXN3000 stacks and total EXN3000 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration.
33
Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N5300 filer. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.

The following table lists the feature codes for N5300 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5300, see Appendix F, Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems, on page 201.
Table 18. N5300 filer feature codes Feature Code Description 2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable Copper-Fiber Converter Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernet cable 4-Gbps Extended Long-wave SFP 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable2 3m FCoE SFP+ copper cable
2
Machine 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 A20 A20 A20 A20
Model
Feature Code 1037 1040 1041 1042 1044 1047 1050 1051 1053 1054 1055 1071 1072 1073 2012
A10, A20 A10, A20 A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20
5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable2 FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 1 m2 FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 3 m2 FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 5 m2 10-Gbps Ethernet SFP
1 2 1
FC 2012 is for use only with FC 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter). For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.
Table 19. N5300 filer installation feature codes Description Field install rack mount kit Machine 2868 Model A10, A20 Feature 9202
34

The IBM System Storage N5300 gateways consist of the Model G10 and Model G20, and associated software. The Model G10 is designed to provide a single node gateway with NFS, CIFS, FCP and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The Model G20 provides an active/active (or high availability) dual-node base unit. The N5300 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5300 gateway interoperability is available at: www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html Mixed disk/LUN support is available on N series gateway systems. This support requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher and enables the use of both third-party disks and N series storage expansion units on N series gateways. This support also enables SnapLock Compliance, LockVault Compliance, and Disk Sanitization on gateways when used with IBM N series storage only. These features are not supported on third-party storage devices. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N5300 Model G10

The N5300 Model G10 gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis includes: v Two AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors (per node), each with 1 MB of level 2 cache v Four GB random access ECC memory v v v v v v v v v Up to five backend Fibre Channel loops per node 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) 252 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20 Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (ten with the addition of expansion HBA features) Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or initiators Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans Redundant cooling fans Three PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs) Front LCD message display
All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For the N5300 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is three. Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are described in Appendix F, Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems, on page 201.
35
The Model G10 may be upgraded to a Model G20. The upgrade from a Model G10 to a Model G20 is a disruptive upgrade.
N5300 Model G20

The N5300 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5300 Model G10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO) software feature. The Model G20 consists of two processing nodes that are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable gateway. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space. The N5300 Model G20 includes: v Four AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors (per node), each with 1 MB of level 2 cache v Eight GB random access ECC memory v Up to ten backend Fibre Channel loops v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) v 252 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20 v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (ten with the addition of expansion HBA features) v Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or initiators v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans v Redundant cooling fans v Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per node (always ordered and installed in pairs) v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM6 adapter, between the two processing N5000 nodes v Front LCD message display All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. The maximum number of adapters that may be added to the N5300 Model G20 is six. When adapter cards are ordered for the Model G20 on the initial order, they must be ordered and added in pairs, one per node, so that both nodes are populated with the same number of each type of PCIe adapters. Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are described in Appendix F, Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems, on page 201. The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G20 (with respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre Channel SAN. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices for your N5000 series gateway system.
36
www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

Table 20. N5300 gateway feature codes Description 2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable Copper-Fiber Converter Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernet cable 4-Gbps Extended Long-wave SFP 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable2 3m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable
2 2
Machine 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 2869 G20 G20 G20 G20
Model
Feature 1037 1040 1041 1042 1044 1047 1050 1051 1053 1054 1055 1071 1072 1073 2012
G10, G20 G10, G20 G20 G10, G20 G10, G20 G10, G20 G10, G20 G10, G20 G10, G20 G10, G20 G10, G20
FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 1 2869 m2 FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 3 2869 m2 FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 5 2869 m2 10-Gbps Ethernet SFP
1 2 1
2869

The IBM System Storage N5500 filers consist of the Model A10 or Model A20, and associated software. The N5500 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These
37
include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5500 interoperability is available at: www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N5500 A10
The N5500 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node filer with NFS, CIFS, FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N5500 filer does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This base chassis includes: v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors v 4 GB of ECC memory v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports v Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or initiators v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans v Redundant cooling fans v Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs) v Front LCD message display For the N5500 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is three. Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems are described in Appendix E, Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems, on page 193. The N5500 Model A10 can have a maximum of four dual-path (redundant) Fibre Channel storage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000). On the Model A10, in order to have the maximum number of dual-path Fibre Channel storage loops, two additional dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004) are needed. The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured as FCP targets, then more than two dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004) are required to reach the maximum of four dual-path Fibre Channel storage loops for disk storage expansion units. The N5500 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports via the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).
38
The Model A10 may be upgraded to an N5500 Model A20. The upgrade from a Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.
N5500 A20
The N5500 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model A10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO) software feature. The N5500 Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that are designed to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer. Therefore, the Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space. Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 storage system to an N5500 storage system. The N5500 Model A20 includes: v Four Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, two per node v 8 GB of ECC memory, 4 GB per node v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per node v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per node v Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can be configured as targets or initiators v Four redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans, two per node v Redundant cooling fans v Six PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per node (always ordered and installed in pairs) v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM5 adapter, between the two processing nodes v Front LCD message display For the N5500 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is six. Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems are described in Appendix E, Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems, on page 193. The N5500 Model A20 can have a maximum of eight dual-path (redundant) Fibre Channel storage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000). On the Model A20, in order to have the maximum number of dual-path Fibre Channel storage loops, four additional dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004), two per node, are needed. The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured as FCP targets, then more than four dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004) are required to reach the maximum of eight dual-path Fibre Channel storage loops for disk storage expansion units. The N5500 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature
39
number 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007). The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A20 (with respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Both N5500 filer models require the addition of at least one storage expansion unit, either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000. Note: The N5500 does not support attachment of EXN3000 storage expansion units. Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional storage expansion units do not have to meet this requirement. Table 22 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N5500.
Table 22. N5500 raw storage capacity Disk drive capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk drives 336 336 336 336 336 168 336 Maximum physical capacity1 84 TB 107.52 TB 168 TB 259 TB 336 TB 336 TB 24.19 TB
Disk enclosure EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN2000
250 GB SATA disk 24 drives 320 GB SATA disk 24 drives 500 GB SATA disk 24 drives 750 GB SATA disk 24 drives 1 TB SATA disk drives 2 TB SATA disk drives 72 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 144 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 300 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 144 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 24 24 24
EXN2000
24
336
48.38 TB
EXN2000
24
336
100.8 TB
EXN4000
24
336
48.38 TB
40
Table 22. N5500 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk drive capacity 300 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 450 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 600 GB Fibre Channel disk drives Maximum storage enclosures 24 Maximum disk drives 336 Maximum physical capacity1 100.8 TB
EXN4000
24
336
151.2 TB
EXN4000
24
336
201.6 TB
1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N5500 Model is determined by the maximum number of disk drives supported (336) and a maximum physical storage limit of 336 TB. Both limits must be honored.
EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000 or EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N5500 filer. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.

Table 23. N5500 filer feature codes Description 2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable Copper-Fiber Converter 30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernet cable Machine 2865 2865 2865 2865 2865 A20 A20 A20 A20 A10, A20 A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 Model Feature 1037 1040 1041 1042 1047 1050 1051 1053 1054 1055 1071
Extended long-wave SFP (4-Gbps) 2865 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) FCoE SFP+ copper cable, 1 m FCoE SFP+ copper cable, 3 m FCoE SFP+ copper cable, 5 m 2865 2865 2865 2865
FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 1 2865 m
41
Table 23. N5500 filer feature codes (continued) Description Machine Model A10, A20 A10, A20 Feature 1072 1073
FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 3 2865 m FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 5 2865 m Table 24. N5500 filer installation feature codes Description Field install rack mount kit Machine 2865
Model A10, A20
Feature 9202

The IBM System Storage N5500 gateways consist of the Model G10 or Model G20, and associated software. Mixed disk/LUN support is available on N series gateway systems. This support requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher and enables the use of both third-party disks and N series storage expansion units on N series gateways. This support also enables SnapLock Compliance, LockVault Compliance, and Disk Sanitization on gateways when used with IBM N series storage only. These features are not supported on third-party storage devices. Note: The N5500 does not support attachment of EXN3000 storage expansion units. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N5500 G10
The N5500 Model G10 is designed to provide a single-node gateway with NFS, CIFS, FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N5500 gateway does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This base chassis includes: v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors v 4 GB of ECC memory v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports v Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or initiators v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans v Redundant cooling fans v Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs) v Front LCD message display
42
For the N5500 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is three. Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems are described in Appendix E, Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems, on page 193. The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP initiators for attaching to SAN storage or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN). The N5500 Model G10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports via the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007). Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 storage system to an N5500 storage system.
N5500 G20
The N5500 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model G10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO) software feature. The N5500 Model G20 consists of two processing nodes that are designed to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space. The N5500 Model G20 includes: v Four Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, two per node v 8 GB of ECC memory, 4 GB per node v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per node v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per node v Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can be configured as targets or initiators v Four redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans, two per node v Redundant cooling fans v Six PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per node (always ordered and installed in pairs) v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM5 adapter, between the two processing N5000 nodes v Front LCD message display For the N5500 Model G20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is six. Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems are described in Appendix E, Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems, on page 193.
43
The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP initiators for attaching to SAN storage or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN). The N5500 Model G20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007). The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G20 (with respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre Channel SAN. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices for your N5000 series gateway system. www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

Table 25. N5500 gateway feature codes Description 2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable Copper-Fiber Converter 30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernet cable 4-Gbps Extended Long-wave SFP 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) Machine 2865 2865 2865 2865 2865 2865 2865 G20 G20 G20 G20 G10, G20 G20 G10, G20 Model Feature 1037 1040 1041 1042 1047 1050 1051
Table 26. N5500 gateway installation feature codes Description Field install rack mount kit Machine 2865 Model G10, G20 Feature 9202
44

The IBM System Storage N5600 filers consist of the Model A10 or Model A20, and associated software. The N5600 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5600 interoperability is available at: www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N5600 A10
The N5600 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node filer with NFS, CIFS, FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N5600 filer does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This base chassis includes: v v v v v v v v v v v Two 1.8 GHz 64-bit processors 8 GB of DDR-400 ECC memory 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or initiators Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans Redundant cooling fans Three PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs) One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port One serial console port Front LCD message display
For the N5600 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is three. A fourth expansion slot is used for the standard (included with the N5600) 512 MB NVRAM adapter card. Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5600 storage system are described in Appendix F, Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems, on page 201. The N5600 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of five dual-path Fibre Channel loops (10 Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of three optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature number 1014). The five loops will support a maximum of 420 total disk drives. The Model A10 can be up upgraded to a maximum of 16 gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of three optional quad-port copper NICs (feature number 1023).
45
The Model A10 may be upgraded to an N5600 Model A20. The upgrade from a Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade. Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 or N5500 storage system to an N5600 storage system.
N5600 A20
The N5600 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model A10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO) software feature. The N5600 Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that are designed to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer. Therefore, the Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space. The N5600 Model A20 includes: v Four 1.8 GHz 64-bit processors v 16 GB of DDR-400 ECC memory v 1 GB (512 MB per node) of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or initiators v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans v Redundant cooling fans v Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs) v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports v Two serial console ports v Front LCD message display For the N5600 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is six. Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5600 storage system are described in Appendix F, Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems, on page 201. The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path Fibre Channel loops (20 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of six optional Fibre Channel HBA for Disk Attachments (feature number 1014). The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 32 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional quad-port copper gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1023). The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A20 (with respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Both N5600 filer models require the addition of at least one N series storage expansion unit.
46
Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional storage expansion units do not have to meet this requirement. The maximum raw storage capacity of the N5600 Model is determined by the maximum number of disk drives supported (504) and a maximum physical storage limit of 504 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 1008 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x. Both limits must be honored.
Table 27. N5600 raw storage capacity (without redundant cabling) Disk enclosure EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 Maximum storage enclosures 36 36 36 36 36 Maximum disk drives 504 504 504 504 252 Maximum physical capacity1 126 TB 252 TB 378 TB 504 TB 504 TB
36
504
1008 TB
36 36 36 36 36 36
504 504 504 504 504 252
151.2 TB 226.8 TB 302.4 TB 252 TB 504 TB 504 TB
36
504
1008 TB

1
36
504
72.57 TB
36
504
151.2 TB
36 36
504 504
226.8 TB 302.4 TB
47
Table 28. N5600 raw storage capacity (with redundant cabling) Disk enclosure EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 Maximum storage enclosures 24 24 24 24 24 Maximum disk drives 336 336 336 336 168 Maximum physical capacity1 84 TB 168 TB 252 TB 336 TB 336 TB
24
336
672 TB
24 24 24 24 24 24
336 336 336 336 336 168
100.8 TB 151.6 TB 201.6 TB 168 TB 336 TB 336 TB
24
336
672 TB

1
24
336
48.38 TB
24
336
100.8 TB
24 24
336 336
151.2 TB 201.6 TB
In a system with redundant cabling, the maximum raw storage capacity of the N5600 is determined by the maximum number of disk drives supported (504) and a maximum physical storage limit of 504 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 1008 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x. Both limits must be honored.
EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. An EXN3000 SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported EXN3000 stacks and total EXN3000 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration.
48
Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N5600 filer. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.

Table 29. N5600 filer feature codes Feature Code Description 2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable Copper-Fiber Converter Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernet cable Extended long-wave SFP (4-Gbps) 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable2 3m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 1 m2 FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 3 m2 FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 5 m2 10-Gbps Ethernet SFP
1 2 1 2
Machine 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 A20 A20 A20 A20
Model
Feature Code 1037 1040 1041 1042 1044 1047 1050 1051 1053 1054 1055 1071 1072 1073 2012
A10, A20 A10, A20 A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20
Table 30. N5600 filer installation feature codes Description Field install rack mount kit Machine 2868 Model A10, A20 Feature 9202
49

The IBM System Storage N5600 gateways consist of the Model G10 and Model G20, and associated software. The N5600 Model G10 is designed to provide a single node gateway with NFS, CIFS, FCP and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N5600 Model G20 provides an active/active (or high availability) dual-node base unit. The N5600 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only) servers. The most current information on N5600 gateway interoperability is available at: www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html Mixed disk/LUN support is available on N series gateway systems. This support requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher and enables the use of both third-party disks and N series storage expansion units on N series gateways. This support also enables SnapLock Compliance, LockVault Compliance, and Disk Sanitization on gateways when used with N series storage only. These features are not be supported on third-party storage devices. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N5600 Model G10

The N5600 Model G10 gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis includes: v Two AMD 1.8 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors, each with 1 MB of level 2 cache v 8 GB of DDR-400 memory v Up to five backend Fibre Channel loops per node v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) v 504 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20 v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (ten with the addition of expansion HBA features) v Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or initiators v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans v Redundant cooling fans v Three PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs) v Front LCD message display All the adapter card slots of the N5600 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For the N5600 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is three. Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are described in Appendix F, Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems, on page 201.
50
The Model G10 may be upgraded to a Model G20. The upgrade from a Model G10 to a Model G20 is a disruptive upgrade.
N5600 Model G20

The N5600 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5600 Model G10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO) software feature. The Model G20 consists of two processing nodes that are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable gateway. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space. The N5600 Model G20 includes: v Four AMD 1.8 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors, each with 1 MB of level 2 cache v 16 GB of DDR-400 memory v Up to ten backend Fibre Channel loops v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) v 504 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20 v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (20 with the addition of expansion HBA features) v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or initiators v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans v Redundant cooling fans v Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per node (always ordered and installed in pairs) v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM6 adapter, between the two processing N5000 nodes v Front LCD message display All the adapter card slots of the N5600 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. The maximum number of adapters that may be added to the Model G20 is six. When adapter cards are ordered for Model G20 on the initial order, they must be ordered and added in pairs, one per node, so that both nodes are populated with the same number of each type of PCIe adapters. Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are described in Appendix F, Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems, on page 201. The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G20 (with respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre Channel SAN. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices for your N5000 series gateway system.
51
www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

Table 31. N5600 gateway feature codes Description 2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable Copper-Fiber Converter Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernet cable 4-Gbps Extended long-wave SFP 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable2 3m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable
2 2
Machine 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 2868 G20 G20 G20 G20
Model
Feature 1037 1040 1041 1042 1044 1047 1050 1051 1053 1054 1055 1071 1072 1073 2012
G10, G20 G10, G20 G20 G10, G20 G10, G20 G10, G20 G10, G20 G10, G20 G10, G20 G10, G20 G10, G20
1 2 1
2868

The N6040 storage controllers consist of the Model A10 and Model A20 and associated software with gateway options. The N6040 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6040 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis.
52
Note: All N6040 models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used as gateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with the suffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW). The IBM System Storage N6040 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) servers. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices for your N series filer system. www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N6040 Model A10

The N6040 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with iSCSI support and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N6040 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6040 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis includes: v One dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processor v 4 GB of random access ECC memory v Two integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports v Four integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports v v v v Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Three PCIe X8 expansion slots and one PCIe X4 expansion slot One serial console port One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port
The maximum number of additional expansion adapters for the N6040 Model A10 is four. Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N6040 storage systems are described in Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 211. The N6040 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops via the addition of four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk/Tape Attachment (feature number 1029). The Model A10 supports a maximum of 420 total disk drives. The N6040 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of 18 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1023). The N6040 Model A10 may be upgraded to a Model A20. The upgrade from a Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.
53
N6040 Model A20

The N6040 Model A20 is designed to provide a dual-node storage controller with iSCSI support and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N6040 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function to the Model A10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The Model A20 supports a maximum of 420 drives. The Model A20 consists of two storage controllers housed in a single chassis, 6U in height. They are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. The base chassis includes: v Two dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors (one per node) v 8 GB of random access ECC memory (4 GB per node) v Four integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports (two per node) v Eight integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports (four per node) v Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans v Six PCIe X8 expansion slots (three per node) and two PCIe X4 expansion slots (one per node) v Two serial console ports (one per node) v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports (one per node) The maximum number of additional expansion adapters for the N6040 Model A20 is eight (four per node). Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N6040 storage systems are described in Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 211. The N6040 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops (20 4-Gbps FC ports) via the addition of eight optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk/Tape Attachment (feature number 1029). The Model A20 supports a maximum of 420 total disk drives. The N6040 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 36 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of eight optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1023).

Both N6040 models require the addition of at least one N series storage expansion unit per node. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit is a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN2000 and EXN4000 FC storage expansion units. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units are 3U rack-mountable disk enclosures containing a minimum of five, up to a maximum of fourteen, Fibre Channel disk drives. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel disk drive speeds and capacities:
54
v 15,000 revolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB capacities v 10,000 revolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing 5, and up to a maximum of 24, SAS or SATA disk drives. The supported disk drives are: v SAS: 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacities v SATA: 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, and 2 TB physical capacities Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional storage expansion units do not have to meet this requirement. Table 33 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N6040.
30
420
840 TB
30 30 30 30 30 30
420 420 420 420 420 210
126 TB 189 TB 252 TB 210 TB 420 TB 420 TB
30
420
840 TB
EXN4000 and EXN2000 EXN4000 and EXN2000
30
420
60.48 TB
30
420
126 TB
55
Table 33. N6040 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN4000 EXN4000 Maximum storage enclosures 30 30 Maximum disk drives 420 420 Maximum physical capacity1 189 TB 252 TB
Disk drive capacity 450 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 600 GB Fibre Channel disk drives
1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N6040 is determined by the maximum number of disk drives supported (420) and a maximum physical storage limit of 420 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 840 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x. Both limits must be honored.
EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) is supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. An EXN3000 SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported EXN3000 stacks and total EXN3000 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N6040 system. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.
N6040 feature codes

The following table lists the feature codes for N6040 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6040, see Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 211. v Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page 229
Table 34. N6040 feature codes Feature Code Description Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 30m 50-micron MMF cable (LC/SC) 4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable2 3m FCoE SFP+ copper cable2 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable2 Machine 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858 Model A10, A20 A10, A20 A10 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 Feature Code 1044 1047 1050 1051 1053 1054 1055
56
Table 34. N6040 feature codes (continued) Feature Code Description FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 1 m2 FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 3 m2 FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 5 m2 10-Gbps Ethernet SFP
1 2 1
Machine 2858 2858 2858 2858
Model A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20 A10, A20
Feature Code 1071 1072 1073 2012
Table 35. N6040 installation feature codes Description Plant install in 2101 rack Field install rack mount kit Machine 2858 2858 Model A10, A20 A10, A20 Feature 9201 9202

The N6060 storage controllers consist of the Model A12 and Model A22 and associated software with gateway options. The N6060 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6060 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. Note: All N6060 models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used as gateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with the suffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW). The IBM System Storage N6060 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) servers. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices for your N series filer system. www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N6060 Model A12

The N6060 Model A12 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with iSCSI support and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features.
57
The N6060 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6060 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis includes: v v v v v v v v One dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processor 8 GB of random access ECC memory Two integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Four integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Three PCI-e X8 expansion slots and one PCI-e X4 expansion slot One serial console port One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port
The maximum number of additional expansion adapters for the N6060 Model A12 is four. Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N6060 storage systems are described in Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 211. The N6060 Model A12 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops via the addition of four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk/Tape Attachment (feature number 1029). The Model A12 supports a maximum of 672 total disk drives. The N6060 Model A12 can be upgraded to a maximum of 18 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature numbers 1023). The N6060 Model A12 may be upgraded to a Model A22. The upgrade from a Model A12 to a Model A22 is a disruptive upgrade.
N6060 Model A22

The N6060 Model A22 is designed to provide a dual-node storage controller with iSCSI support and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N6060 Model A22 is designed to provide identical function to the Model A12, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The Model A22 consists of two storage controllers housed in a single chassis, 6U in height. They are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. The base chassis includes: v Two dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors (one per node) v 16 GB of random access ECC memory (8 GB per node) v Four integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports (two per node) v Eight integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports (four per node) v Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans v Six PCIe X8 expansion slots (three per node) and two PCIe X4 expansion slots (one per node) v Two serial console ports (one per node) v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports (one per node)
58
The maximum number of additional expansion adapters for the N6060 Model A22 is eight (four per node). Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N6060 storage systems are described in Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 211. The N6060 Model A22 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops (20 4-Gbps FC ports) via the addition of eight optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk/Tape Attachment (feature number 1029). The Model A22 supports a maximum of 672 total disk drives. The N6060 Model A22 can be upgraded to a maximum of 36 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of eight optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1023).

Both N6060 models require the addition of at least one N series storage expansion unit per node. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit is a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN2000 and EXN4000 FC storage expansion units. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units are 3U rack-mountable disk enclosures containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk drives. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel disk drive speeds and capacities: v 15,000 revolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB capacities v 10,000 revolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing 5, and up to a maximum of 24, SAS or SATA disk drives. The supported disk drives are: v SAS: 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacities v SATA: 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB and 2 TB physical capacities Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional storage expansion units do not have to meet this requirement. Table 36 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N6060.
Table 36. N6060 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure EXN1000 Maximum storage enclosures 48 Maximum disk drives 672 Maximum physical capacity1 168 TB
Disk drive capacity 250 GB SATA disk drives
59
Table 36. N6060 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 Maximum storage enclosures 48 48 48 48 Maximum disk drives 672 672 672 336 Maximum physical capacity1 336 TB 502 TB 672 TB 672 TB
Disk drive capacity 500 GB SATA disk drives 750 GB SATA disk drives 1 TB SATA disk drives 2 TB SATA disk drives In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x
48
672
1344 TB
48 48 48 48 48 48
672 672 672 672 672 336
201 TB 302 TB 403 TB 336 TB 672 TB 672 TB
48
672
1344 TB
48
672
100 TB
48
672
201 TB
48 48
672 672
302 TB 403 TB
1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N6060 is determined by the maximum number of disk drives supported (672) and a maximum physical storage limit of 672 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 1344 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x. Both limits must be honored.
EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) is supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. An EXN3000 SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported EXN3000 stacks and total EXN3000 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N6060 system. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability
60
of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.
N6060 feature codes

The following table lists the feature codes for N6060 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6060, see Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 211.
Table 37. N6060 feature codes Feature Code Description Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 30m 50-micron MMF cable (LC/SC) 4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable2 3m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable
2 2
Machine 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858
Model A12, A22 A12, A22 A12 A12, A22 A12, A22 A12, A22 A12, A22 A12, A22 A12, A22 A12, A22 A12, A22
Feature Code 1044 1047 1050 1051 1053 1054 1055 1071 1072 1073 2012
FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 1 m2 FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 3 m2 FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 5 m2 10-Gbps Ethernet SFP
1 2 1

The N6070 storage controllers consist of the Model A11 and Model A21 and associated software with gateway options. The N6070 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6070 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. Note: All N6070 models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used as gateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with the suffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW).
61
The IBM System Storage N6070 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) servers. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices for your N series filer system. www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N6070 Model A11

The N6070 Model A11 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with iSCSI support and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N6070 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6070 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis includes: v Two dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors v v v v v 16 GB of random access ECC memory Two integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Four integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Three PCIe X8 expansion slots and one PCIe X4 expansion slot
v One serial console port v One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port The maximum number of additional expansion adapters for the N6070 Model A11 is four. Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N6070 storage systems are described in Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 211. The N6070 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops via the addition of four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk/Tape Attachment (feature number 1029). The Model A11 supports a maximum of 840 total disk drives. The N6070 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 18 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1023). The N6070 Model A11 may be upgraded to a Model A21. The upgrade from a Model A11 to a Model A21 is a disruptive upgrade.
N6070 Model A21

The N6070 Model A21 is designed to provide a dual-node storage controller with iSCSI support and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features.
62
The N6070 Model A21 is designed to provide identical function to the Model A11, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The Model A21 supports a maximum of 420 drives. The Model A21 consists of two storage controllers housed in a single chassis, 6U in height. They are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. The base chassis includes: v Four dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors (two per node) v 32 GB of random access ECC memory (16 GB per node) v Four integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports (two per node) v Eight integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports (four per node) v Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans v Six PCIe X8 expansion slots (three per node) and two PCIe X4 expansion slots (one per node) v Two serial console ports (one per node) v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports (one per node) The maximum number of additional expansion adapters for the N6070 Model A21 is eight (four per node). Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N6070 storage systems are described in Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 211. The N6070 Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops (20 4-Gbps FC ports) via the addition of eight optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk/Tape Attachment (feature number 1029). The Model A21 supports a maximum of 840 total disk drives. The N6070 Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 36 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of eight optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1023).

Both N6070 models require the addition of at least one N series storage expansion unit per node. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit is a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN2000 and EXN4000 FC storage expansion units. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units are 3U rack-mountable disk enclosures containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk drives. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel disk drive speeds and capacities: v 15,000 revolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB capacities v 10,000 revolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities
63
The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing 5, and up to a maximum of 24, SAS or SATA disk drives. The supported disk drives are: v SAS: 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacities v SATA: 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, and 2 TB physical capacities Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional storage expansion units do not have to meet this requirement. Table 39 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N6070.
60
840
1680 TB
60 60 60 60 60 60
840 840 840 840 840 420
252 TB 378 TB 504 TB 420 TB 840 TB 840 TB
60
840
1680 TB
60
840
120.96 TB
60
840
252 TB
60 60
840 840
378 TB 504 TB
64
Table 39. N6070 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure

1
Disk drive capacity
Maximum storage enclosures
Maximum disk drives
Maximum physical capacity1
EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) is supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. An EXN3000 SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported EXN3000 stacks and total EXN3000 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N6070 system. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.
N6070 feature codes

The following table lists the feature codes for N6070 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6070, see Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 211.
Table 40. N6070 feature codes Feature Code Description Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 30m 50-micron MMF cable (LC/SC) 4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable2 3m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable
2 2
Machine 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858 2858
Model A11, A21 A11, A21 A11 A11, A21 A11, A21 A11, A21 A11, A21 A11, A21 A11, A21 A11, A21 A11, A21
Feature Code 1044 1047 1050 1051 1053 1054 1055 1071 1072 1073 2012
FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 1 m2 FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 3 m2 FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 5 m2 10-Gbps Ethernet SFP
1
65
Table 40. N6070 feature codes (continued) Feature Code Description

1 2
Machine
Model
Feature Code

The IBM System Storage N6210 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. Supported systems include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) servers. The N6210 systems consist of the Model C10, Model C20, and associated software. Both models can be configured, via optional features, to be either storage controllers or gateways. Dual-node configurations include Clustered Failover (CFO) support (via required feature), designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. Both models must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. None of the N6210 models include storage in the base chassis. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices for your N series system. www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N6210 models
IBM System Storage N6210 storage controllers include: v Model C20 - An active/active dual-node base unit v Model C10 - A single-node base unit The Model C10 can be upgraded to a Model C20; model upgrades are disruptive. Each chassis is a 3U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6210 storage controllers do not include storage in the base chassis. Note: All these models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used as gateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with the suffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW). Both N6210 models feature:
66
v High data availability and system-level redundancy designed to address the needs of business-critical and mission-critical applications v Single, integrated architecture designed to support concurrent block I/O and file serving over Ethernet and Fibre Channel SAN infrastructures v High throughput and fast response times for database, email, and technical applications v Support of enterprise customers requiring unified access to Network Attached Storage (NAS) via Fibre Channel (FC) or Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) v Attachment of Fibre Channel (FC), Serial Attached SCSI (SAS), and Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) disk expansion units designed to allow deployment in multiple environments, including data retention, NearStore, disk-to-disk backup scenarios, and high-performance, mission-critical I/O intensive operations All these models support the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN2000 and EXN4000 FC storage expansion units, and the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit. At least one storage expansion unit must be attached to the N series system.
Table 42. N6210 physical attributes Attribute Number of controllers Rack space required Dual core 2.3 GHz CPU Random access memory (GB) 4-Gb Fibre Channel ports 6-Gb SAS ports Disk drives supported 1-Gb Ethernet ports PCIe expansion slots Serial console ports LAN management (RLM) ports Redundant power supplies and cooling fans C10 1 3U 1 4 2 2 240 2 2 1 1 Yes C20 2 3U 2 8 4 4 240 4 4 2 2 Yes
Optional HBA features can be used to increase the maximums as follows. Note that each platform is limited by the maximum number of adapters that can be installed.
Attribute FC loops FC loops (dual-path) SAS stacks SAS stacks (dual-path) 10-Gb Ethernet ports 10-Gb FCoE ports EXN1000 storage expansion units EXN2000 storage expansion units EXN3000 storage expansion units C10 10 5 5 n/a 4 4 17 17 20 C20 10 5 n/a 4 8 8 17 17 20
67
Attribute EXN4000 storage expansion units
C10 17
C20 17

The N6210 storage controllers may be ordered without an accompanying expansion unit, but it requires at least one storage expansion unit to be operational. The EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN3000, or EXN4000 satisfy this requirement. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit provides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing five, and up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units provide a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing five, and up to a maximum of 14, FC disk drives. They support FC disk drives of 300 GB physical capacity (10,000 rpm or 15,000 rpm), 450 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm), and 600 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm). The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing 5, and up to a maximum of 24, SAS or SATA disk drives. The supported disk drives are: v SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacities v SATA: 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, and 2 TB physical capacities Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). For the initial order of the IBM System Storage N series, orders for EXNx000 expansion units may not include more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives. The maximum raw storage capacity of N6210 systems is determined by the number of disk drives supported. N6210 systems support a maximum of 240 hard drive spindles. The following table describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N6210:
Table 43. N6210 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 Maximum storage enclosures 17 17 17 Maximum disk drives 238 238 238 119 Maximum physical capacity 119 TB 178.5 TB 238 TB 238 TB
Disk drive capacity 500 GB SATA disk drives 750 GB SATA disk drives 1 TB SATA disk drives 2 TB SATA disk drives
In systems 17 running Data ONTAP 7.3.x 17 In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode and higher
238
476 TB
EXN3000
300 GB SAS drives
20
240
72 TB
68
Table 43. N6210 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 Maximum storage enclosures 20 20 20 20 In systems 20 running Data ONTAP 7.3.x In systems 20 running Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode and higher EXN4000 EXN4000 EXN4000 300 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 17 450 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 17 600 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 17 Maximum disk drives 240 240 240 240 120 Maximum physical capacity 108 TB 144 TB 120 TB 240 TB 240 TB
Disk drive capacity 450 GB SAS drives 600 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives 2 TB SATA disk drives
240
480 TB
238 238 238
180 TB 270 TB 360 TB
EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) is supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. An EXN3000 SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported EXN3000 stacks and total EXN3000 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for N6210 systems. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.
N6210 feature codes

The following table lists the feature codes for N6210 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6210, see Appendix H, Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems, on page 221.
Table 44. N6210 feature codes Feature Code Description Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable1 NIC SFP+ Machine 2858 2858 2858 2858 Model C10, C20 C10, C20 C10, C20 C10, C20 Feature Code 1044 1051 1055 2012
69
Table 44. N6210 feature codes (continued) Feature Code Description 10-Gbps Ethernet SFP+
1
Machine 2858
Model C10, C20
Feature Code 2013
For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.

The IBM System Storage N6240 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. Supported systems include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) servers. The N6240 systems consist of the Model C21, Model E11, Model E21, and associated software. All models can be configured, via optional features, to be either storage controllers or gateways. Dual-node configurations include Clustered Failover (CFO) support (via required feature), designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. All N6240 models must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. None of the N6240 models include storage in the base chassis. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices for your N series system. www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N6240 models
IBM System Storage N6240 storage controllers include: v Model C21 - An active/active dual-node base unit v Model E11 - A single-node base unit v Model E21 - The coupling of two Model E11s Exx models contain an I/O expansion module that provides additional PCIe slots. The I/O expansion is not available on Cxx models. The Model E11 can be upgraded to a Model E21; model upgrades are disruptive. Each chassis is a 3U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6240 storage controllers do not include storage in the base chassis. Note: All these models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used as gateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with the suffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW). All N6240 models feature:
70
v High data availability and system-level redundancy designed to address the needs of business-critical and mission-critical applications v Single, integrated architecture designed to support concurrent block I/O and file serving over Ethernet and Fibre Channel SAN infrastructures v High throughput and fast response times for database, email, and technical applications v Support of enterprise customers requiring unified access to Network Attached Storage (NAS) via Fibre Channel (FC) or Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) v Attachment of Fibre Channel (FC), Serial Attached SCSI (SAS), and Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) disk expansion units designed to allow deployment in multiple environments, including data retention, NearStore, disk-to-disk backup scenarios, and high-performance, mission-critical I/O intensive operations All these models support the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN2000 and EXN4000 FC storage expansion units, and the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit. At least one storage expansion unit must be attached to the N series system.
Table 45. N6240 physical attributes Attribute Number of controllers Rack space required Quad core 2.3 GHz CPU Random access memory (GB) 4-Gb Fibre Channel ports 6-Gb SAS ports Disk drives supported 1-Gb Ethernet ports PCIe expansion slots Serial console ports LAN management (RLM) ports Redundant power supplies and cooling fans C21 2 3U 2 16 4 4 600 4 4 2 2 Yes E11 1 3U 1 8 2 2 600 2 6 1 1 Yes E21 2 6U 2 16 4 4 600 4 12 2 2 Yes
Optional HBA features can be used to increase the maximums as follows. Note that each platform is limited by the maximum number of adapters that can be installed.
Attribute FC loops FC loops (dual-path) SAS stacks SAS stacks (dual-path) 10-Gb Ethernet ports 10-Gb FCoE ports EXN1000 storage expansion units EXN2000 storage expansion units EXN3000 storage expansion units C21 8 4 n/a 4 8 8 42 42 25 E11 13 n/a 13 n/a 8 8 42 42 25 E21 26 13 12 13 16 16 42 42 25
71
Attribute EXN4000 storage expansion units
C21 42
E11 42
E21 42

The N6240 storage controller may be ordered without an accompanying expansion unit, but it requires at least one storage expansion unit to be operational. The EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN3000, or EXN4000 satisfy this requirement. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit provides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing five, and up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units provide a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing five, and up to a maximum of 14, FC disk drives. They support FC disk drives of 300 GB physical capacity (10,000 rpm or 15,000 rpm), 450 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm), and 600 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm). The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing 5, and up to a maximum of 24, SAS or SATA disk drives. The supported disk drives are: v SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacities v SATA: 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, and 2 TB physical capacities Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). For the initial order of the IBM System Storage N series, orders for EXNx000 expansion units may not include more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives. The maximum raw storage capacity of the N6200 series systems is determined by the number of disk drives supported. The N6240 models each support 600 hard drive spindles. The following table describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N6240:
Table 46. N6240 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 Maximum storage enclosures 42 42 42 Maximum disk drives 588 588 588 294 Maximum physical capacity 294 TB 441 TB 588 TB 588 TB
Disk drive capacity 500 GB SATA disk drives 750 GB SATA disk drives 1 TB SATA disk drives 2 TB SATA disk drives
In systems 42 running Data ONTAP 7.3.x 42 In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode and higher
588
1176 TB
EXN3000
300 GB SAS drives
25
600
180 TB
72
Table 46. N6240 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 Maximum storage enclosures 25 25 25 25 In systems 25 running Data ONTAP 7.3.x In systems 25 running Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode and higher EXN4000 EXN4000 EXN4000 300 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 450 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 600 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 42 42 42 Maximum disk drives 600 600 600 600 300 Maximum physical capacity 270 TB 360 TB 300 TB 600 TB 600 TB
Disk drive capacity 450 GB SAS drives 600 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives 2 TB SATA disk drives
600
1200 TB
588 588 588
176.4 TB 264.6 TB 352.8 TB
EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) is supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. An EXN3000 SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported EXN3000 stacks and total EXN3000 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N6240 system. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.
N6240 feature codes

The following table lists the feature codes for N6240 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6240, see Appendix H, Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems, on page 221.
Table 47. N6240 feature codes Feature Code Description Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) Machine 2858 2858 Model C21, E11, E21 C21, E11, E21 Feature Code 1044 1051
73
Table 47. N6240 feature codes (continued) Feature Code Description 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable1 NIC SFP+ 10-Gbps Ethernet SFP+
1
Machine 2858 2858 2858
Model C21, E11, E21 C21, E11, E21 C21, E11, E21
Feature Code 1055 2012 2013
For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.

The N7700 filer storage controllers consist of the Model A11 and Model A21 and associated software with gateway options. The IBM System Storage N7700 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) servers. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices for your N7000 series filer system. www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html Mixed disk/LUN support is available on N series gateway systems. This support requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher and enables the use of both third-party disks and N series storage expansion units on N series gateways. This support also enables SnapLock Compliance, LockVault Compliance, and Disk Sanitization on gateways when used with IBM N series storage only. These features are not supported on third-party storage devices. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N7700 A11
The N7700 Model A11 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with iSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N7700 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N7700 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis includes: v Two AMD 2.6 GHz 64-bit Opteron 252 processors, each with 1 MB of level 2 cache v v v v v 16 GB of DDR-333 memory 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) Six integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans
v Three PCI-X expansion slots
74
v Six PCIe expansion slots (Five PCIe slots are available for customer use. One PCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter.) v One serial console port For the N7700 Model A11, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters is eight (three PCI-X and five PCIe). One PCIe expansion slot is used for the standard (included with the N7700) 512 MB NVRAM adapter card. Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage systems are described in Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page 229. The N7700 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014, 1029, or 1035). The 14 loops will support a maximum of 840 total disk drives. The Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of two optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1009). The Model A11 may be upgraded to a Model A21. The upgrade from a Model A11 to a Model A21 is a disruptive upgrade.
N7700 A21
The N7700 Model A21 is designed to provide identical function as the N7700 Model A11, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The N7700 Model A21 supports a maximum of 840 drives (or LUNs, with the gateway option), 32 GB of DDR-333 memory, and ten backend Fibre Channel loops. The Model A21 consists of two nodes that are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. For the Model A21, each node is a 6U rack-mountable storage controller. Therefore, the Model A21 occupies a total of 12U of rack space. The Model A21 includes: v Four AMD 2.6 GHz 64-bit Opteron 252 processors, each with 1 MB of level 2 cache v 32 GB of DDR-333 memory v 1 GB of NVRAM 12 integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports 16 integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans Six PCI-X expansion slots 12 PCIe expansion slots (Ten PCIe slots are available for customer use. Two PCIe slots are reserved for NVRAM6 adapters.) v Two serial console ports v v v v v For the N7700 Model A21, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters is 16 (six PCI-X and 10 PCIe). Two PCIe expansion slots are used for the standard (included with the N7700) 512 MB NVRAM adapter cards. Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage systems are described in Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page 229.
75
The N7700 Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of two optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature number 1014, 1029, or 1035). The Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1009). The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A21 (with respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Both N7700 filer models require the addition of at least one N series storage expansion unit. Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional storage expansion units do not have to meet this requirement. The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7700 system is determined only by the number of disk drives supported. Table 48 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N7700.
84
840
1680 TB
EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000
300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 600 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives
84 84 84 84 84
840 840 840 840 840
252 TB 378 TB 504 TB 420 TB 840 TB
76
Table 48. N7700 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN3000 Maximum storage enclosures 84 Maximum disk drives 420 Maximum physical capacity1 840 TB
Disk drive capacity 2 TB SATA disk drives In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x
84
840
1680 TB
EXN2000 EXN4000 and EXN2000 EXN4000 and EXN2000 EXN4000 EXN4000

1
72 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 144 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 300 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 450 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 600 GB Fibre Channel disk drives
84 84
840 840
60.48 TB 120.96 TB
84
840
252 TB
84 84
840 840
378 TB 504 TB
EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) is supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. An EXN3000 SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported EXN3000 stacks and total EXN3000 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N7700 filer. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.
Connecting an N7700 gateway to external storage

You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre Channel SAN. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices for your N7000 series gateway system. www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html
77
Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

The following table lists the feature codes for N7700 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N7700, see Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page 229.
Table 49. N7700 filer feature codes Description 2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable Copper-fiber converter Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 30m 50-micron MMF cable (LC/SC)1 4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable3 3m FCoE SFP+ copper cable3 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable3 Machine 2866 2866 2866 2866 2866 2866 2866 2866 2866 2866 2866 Model A20, A21 A20, A21 A20, A21 A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 A20, A21 A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 Feature 1037 1040 1041 1042 1044 1047 1050 1051 1053 1054 1055 1071 1072 1073 2012
1 2 3 2
2866
For use with feature codes 1008 or 1031. FC 2012 is for use only with FC 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter). For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.
Table 50. N7700 filer installation feature codes Description Plant install in 2101 rack Field install rack mount kit Machine 2866 2866 Model A10, A11, A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 Feature 9201 9202
78

The N7900 filer storage controllers consist of the Model A11 and Model A21 and associated software with gateway options. The IBM System Storage N7900 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) servers. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices for your N7000 series filer system. www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html Mixed disk/LUN support is available on N series gateway systems. This support requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher and enables the use of both third-party disks and N series storage expansion units on N series gateways. This support also enables SnapLock Compliance, LockVault Compliance, and Disk Sanitization on gateways when used with IBM N series storage only. These features are not supported on third-party storage devices. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
N7900 A11
The N7900 Model A11 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with iSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N7900 Model A11 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N7900 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis includes: v Four AMD 2.6 GHz Opteron 885 64-bit dual-core processors, each with 1 MB of level 2 cache v v v v v v 32 GB of DDR-333 memory 2 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) Six integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans Three PCI-X expansion slots
v Six PCIe expansion slots (Five PCIe slots are available for customer use. One PCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter.) v One serial console port For the N7900 Model A11, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters is eight (three PCI-X and five PCIe). One PCIe expansion slot is used for the standard (included with the N7900) 2 GB NVRAM adapter card. Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage systems are described in Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page 229.
79
The N7900 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 multi-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014, 1029, or 1035). The 14 loops will support a maximum of 1176 total disk drives (or LUNs, with the gateway option). The Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of two optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1009). The Model A11 may be upgraded to a Model A21. The upgrade from a Model A11 to a Model A21 is a disruptive upgrade.
N7900 A21
The N7900 Model A21 is designed to provide identical function as the N7900 Model A11, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The N7900 Model A21 also supports a maximum of 1176 drives (or LUNs, with the gateway option) and 14 backend Fibre Channel loops. The Model A21 consists of two nodes that are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. For the Model A21, each node is a 6U rack-mountable storage controller. Therefore, the Model A21 occupies a total of 12U of rack space. The N7900 Model A21 includes: v Eight AMD 2.6 GHz Opteron 885 64-bit dual-core processors, each with 1 MB of level 2 cache v 64 GB of DDR-333 memory v 4 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) v 12 integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports v 16 integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans v Six PCI-X expansion slots v 12 PCIe expansion slots (Ten PCIe slots are available for customer use. Two PCIe slots are reserved for NVRAM6 adapters.) v Two serial console ports For the N7900 Model A21, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters is 16 (six PCI-X and 10 PCIe). Two PCIe expansion slots are used for the standard (included with the N7900) 2 GB NVRAM adapter cards. Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage systems are described in Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page 229. The N7900 Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014, 1029, or 1035). The Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1009). The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A21 (with respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables
80
are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Both N7900 filer models require the addition of at least one N series storage expansion unit. Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional storage expansion units do not have to meet this requirement. The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7900 system is determined only by the number of disk drives supported. Table 51 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N7900.
Table 51. N7900 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 Maximum storage enclosures 84 84 84 84 84 Maximum disk drives 1176 1176 1176 1176 588 Maximum physical capacity 294 TB 588 TB 882 TB 1176 TB 1176 TB
Disk drive capacity 250 GB SATA disk drives 500 GB SATA disk drives 750 GB SATA disk drives 1 TB SATA disk drives 2 TB SATA disk drives
1
In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x
84
1176
2352 TB
84 84 84 84 84 84
1176 1176 1176 1176 1176 588
352.80 TB 529.20 TB 705.6 TB 588 TB 1176 TB 1176 TB
84
1176
2352 TB
EXN2000 EXN4000 and EXN2000
84 84
1176 1176
82.67 TB 169.34 TB
81
Table 51. N7900 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN4000 and EXN2000 EXN4000 EXN4000
1
Disk drive capacity 300 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 450 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 600 GB Fibre Channel disk drives
Maximum storage enclosures 84
Maximum disk drives 1176
Maximum physical capacity 352.80 TB
84 84
1176 1176
529.20 TB 705.6 TB
EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. An EXN3000 SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported EXN3000 stacks and total EXN3000 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N7900 filer. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.
Connecting an N7900 gateway to external storage

You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre Channel SAN. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices for your N7000 series gateway system. www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

The following table lists the feature codes for N7900 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N7900, see Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page 229.
Table 52. N7900 filer feature codes Description 2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable Machine 2867 Model A20, A21 Feature 1037
82
Table 52. N7900 filer feature codes (continued) Description 5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable Copper-Fiber Converter Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 30m 50-micron MMF cable (LC/SC)1 4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 3m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable Machine 2867 2867 2867 2867 2867 2867 2867 2867 2867 2867 Model A20, A21 A20, A21 A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 A20, A21 A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 Feature 1040 1041 1042 1044 1047 1050 1051 1053 1054 1055 1071 1072 1073 2012
FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 1 2867 m FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 3 2867 m FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 5 2867 m 10-Gbps Ethernet SFP
1 2 3 2
2867
For use with feature codes 1008 or 1031. FC 2012 is for use only with FC 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter). For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.
Table 53. N7900 filer installation feature codes Description Plant install in 2101 rack Field install rack mount kit Machine 2867 2867 Model A10, A11, A20, A21 A10, A11, A20, A21 Feature 9201 9202
EXN1000 storage expansion unit hardware features

The IBM System Storage EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit is a SATA disk storage device for IBM System Storage N series systems. The EXN1000 3U disk storage expansion unit may be mounted in any industry-standard 19-inch rack. The EXN1000 contains: v Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fans
83
v Dual redundant disk storage expansion unit switched controllers v Fourteen hard disk drive bays. The EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit is shipped with a minimum of five SATA disk drives, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (all of the same capacity), in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB or 2 TB physical capacities. v With 250 GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 3.5 TB of physical storage capacity. v With 320 GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 4.48 TB of physical storage capacity. v With 500 GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 7 TB of physical storage capacity. v With 750 GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 10.5 TB of physical storage capacity. v With 1 TB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 14 TB of physical storage capacity. v With 2 TB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 28 TB of physical storage capacity. Note: While the initial order must contain 14 drives, at least five of the drives must be installed in the EXN1000 enclosure with drive blank covers (feature 4099) covering the remaining drive bays. Attention: 320 GB SATA hard disk drives are not supported for use in EXN1000s when used in N7700 and N7900 filer configurations.
EXN1000 feature codes

Table 54 lists the feature codes for the EXN1000.
Table 54. EXN1000 feature codes Description SFP GBIC Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable 0.5 m 1 Fibre Channel Copper Cable 0.5 m Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable 3.0 m 1 1.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 5.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 250 GB SATA Drive 320 GB SATA Drive 500 GB SATA Drive 750 GB SATA Drive 1 TB SATA Drive 2 TB SATA Drive HDD Blank Panel
2
Machine 2861 2861 2861 2861 2861 2861 2861 2861 2861 2861 2861 2861 2861 2861 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001
Model
Feature 2010 2020 2021 2022 2042 2043 2044 4010 4011 4012 4013 4016 4021 4099
84
Table 54. EXN1000 feature codes (continued) Description

1
Machine
Model
Feature
Fibre Channel Copper NAS to EXP patch cables are supported only for direct connections to storage expansion units from N3700 storage systems with early CPU module designs. For more information, see Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU modules on page 21. 2 320 GB SATA hard disk drives are not supported for use in EXN1000s when used in N7700 and N7900 filer configurations.
The power cord features for the EXN1000 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 171.

The IBM System Storage EXN2000 Fibre Channel storage expansion unit is a Fibre Channel disk storage device for IBM System Storage N series systems. Physical capacity can be scaled up to 4.2 TB for each EXN2000 added to an N series system (assuming the EXN2000 is populated with 14 300 GB HDDs). The EXN2000 contains: v Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fans v Dual redundant disk storage expansion unit switched controllers v Fourteen hard disk drive bays The EXN2000 Fibre Channel storage expansion unit is shipped with a minimum of four Fibre Channel disk drives, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (all of the same capacity). Disk drive options for the EXN2000 include 72 GB (10,000 or 15,000 RPM), 144 GB (10,000 or 15,000 RPM), and 300 GB (10,000 RPM). Note: While the initial order must contain 14 drives, at least four of the drives must be installed in the EXN2000 enclosure with drive blank covers (feature 4099) covering the remaining drive bays.

Table 55. EXN2000 feature codes Description SFP GBIC Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable 0.5 m Machine 2863 2863 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 Model Feature 2010 20201 2021 20221 2042 2043 2044 4000
Fibre Channel Copper Cable 0.5 m 2863 Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable 3.0 m 1.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 5.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 72 GB, 10K RPM Fibre Channel HDD 2863 2863 2863 2863 2863
85
Table 55. EXN2000 feature codes (continued) Description 72 GB, 15K RPM Fibre Channel HDD 144 GB, 10K RPM Fibre Channel HDD 144 GB, 15K RPM Fibre Channel HDD 300 GB, 10K RPM Fibre Channel HDD HDD Blank Panel
1
Machine 2863 2863 2863 2863 2863 001 001 001 001 001
Model
Feature 4001 4002 4003 4004 4099
Fibre Channel Copper NAS to EXP patch cables are supported only for direct connections to storage expansion units from N3700 storage systems with early CPU module designs. For more information, see Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU modules on page 21.

The IBM System Storage EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit provides low-cost high-capacity Serially Attached SCSI (SAS) or Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) disk storage for supported IBM N series system storage systems. For connectivity to the EXN3000 expansion disks, an available PCI-e I/O slot in the N series controller is needed for the SAS HBA. Note: The EXN3000 SAS/SATA storage expansion unit is available for attachment to all N series systems except the N3300, N3700, N5200, and N5500 systems. The EXN3000 SAS/SATA storage expansion unit is a 4U disk storage expansion unit. The EXN3000 contains: v Redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fans Note: Depending on the disk drive type, your EXN3000 might have two or four power supplies. EXN3000s with SAS disk drives have four power supplies and require the use of four power outlets. EXN3000s with SATA disk drives have two power supplies and require the use of two power outlets. v Dual redundant disk storage expansion unit switched controllers v 24 hard disk drive slots v Diagnostic and status LEDs The 4U disk expansion design of the EXN3000 houses up to 24 SAS or SATA disk drives. Disk drive options for the EXN3000 include 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB SAS drives (15,000 RPM) and 500 GB, 1 TB and 2 TB SATA drives (7200 RPM). SAS and SATA drives cannot be intermixed; the EXN3000 is either a SAS storage controller or a SATA storage controller. The drives must be ordered as features of the EXN3000.
86
For detailed information about the important differences between EXN3000 and EXN1000/2000/4000 storage expansion units, see the IBM System Storage EXN3000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service Guide.

Table 56. EXN3000 feature codes Description SAS disk power supply 2.0 m Mini SAS-QSFP Cable 5.0 m Mini SAS-QSFP Cable 0.5 m SAS QSFP-QSFP Cable 2.0 m SAS QSFP-QSFP Cable 5.0 m SAS QSFP-QSFP Cable 0.5 m SAS RJ-45 ACP Cable 2.0 m SAS RJ-45 ACP Cable 5.0 m SAS RJ-45 ACP Cable 300 GB SAS Drive 450 GB SAS Drive 600 GB SAS Drive 500 GB SATA Drive 1 TB SATA Drive 2 TB SATA Drive Machine 2857 2857 2857 2857 2857 2857 2857 2857 2857 2857 2857 2857 2857 2857 2857 003 003 003 003 003 003 003 003 003 003 003 003 003 003 003 Model Feature 1102 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2063 2064 2065 4015 4016 4017 4018 4020 4021

The IBM System Storage EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion unit is a Fibre Channel disk storage device for the IBM System Storage N series systems. Physical capacity can be scaled up to 8.4 TB for each EXN4000 added to an N series system (assuming the EXN4000 is populated with fourteen 600 GB HDDs). The EXN4000 is designed to provide 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, and 4-Gbps Fibre Channel disk expansion for the IBM System Storage N series storage controllers. EXN4000s attached to a 2-Gbps loop must be manually configured for 2-Gbps speed. Note: The EXN4000 4-Gbps support requires that the N series system be running Data ONTAP 7.2.1 or later. The EXN4000 contains: v Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fans v Dual redundant disk storage expansion unit switched controllers v Fourteen hard disk drive bays The EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion unit is shipped with a minimum of four Fibre Channel disk drives, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (all of the same
87
capacity). Disk drive options for the EXN4000 include 144 GB (15,000 RPM), 300 GB (10,000 RPM or 15,000 RPM), 450 GB (15,000 RPM), and 600 GB (15,000 RPM). Note: While the initial order must contain 14 drives, at least four of the drives must be installed in the EXN4000 enclosure with drive blank covers (feature 4099) covering the remaining drive bays.

Table 57. EXN4000 feature codes Description 4-Gbps SFP GBIC Machine 2863 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 Model Feature 2011 2021 2042 2043 2044 4003 4004 4006 4007 4017 4099
Fibre Channel Copper Cable 0.5 m 2863 1.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 5.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 144 GB, 15K RPM Fibre Channel HDD 300 GB, 10K RPM Fibre Channel HDD 300 GB, 15K RPM Fibre Channel HDD 450 GB, 15K RPM Fibre Channel HDD 600 GB, 15K RPM Fibre Channel HDD HDD Blank Panel 2863 2863 2863 2863 2863 2863 2863 2863 2863
Rack mount requirements

N series storage systems and storage expansion units should be rack-mounted. N series storage systems and storage expansion units include a mounting rail kit. The recommended racks are: v IBM 7014 Model T00, which is a 36U high rack v IBM 7014 Model T42, which is a 42U high rack v IBM 2101 Model N00 rack, which is a 36U high rack v IBM 2101 Model N42 rack, which is a 42U high rack Other racks may be used, provided they allow the clearances specified in Appendix C, Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks, on page 175. N series storage systems and storage expansion units do not mount in all IBM racks. It is important to check clearances when using any rack other than the IBM 7014 or IBM 2101.
88
Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features

The operating system for the IBM NAS N series products is the Data ONTAP software. It is a highly optimized, scalable and flexible operating system that can handle heterogeneous environments. It integrates into UNIX, Windows, and web environments. Data ONTAP characteristics include: v Flexible volumes that do not require prepartitioning v Usage of multiple processors for performance v Block-level data access over a Fibre Channel SAN fabric using FCP and over an IP-based Ethernet network using iSCSI v File-level data access over an IP-based Ethernet network using file access protocols such as NFS, CIFS, HTTP, or FTP v Data protection and recovery v Disk-based data permanence features for regulated and reference data v Double parity RAID v Setup wizard v FilerView, a web-based administration tool that allows IT administrators to fully manage N series systems from remote locations. FilerView is a simple and intuitive web-based single-appliance administration. v SnapShot, which enables instant self-service file backup and recovery for end users. Only block level changes are stored, so only a minimal amount of space is required for each subsequent snapshot. v FlexVol, which allows an administrator to create multiple flexible volumes across a large pool of disks. This feature enables dynamic, non-disruptive storage (thin) provisioning and increases space- and time-efficiency. FlexVol enables more productive use of available storage and helps improve performance. The following protocols are supported for IBM N series storage systems. CIFS CIFS allows Microsoft Windows servers and clients access over the IP network using CIFS file system protocols. Microsoft Windows client access licenses (CALs) are not required. CIFS supports an active directory environment. To enable CIFS support, you must purchase the appropriate feature code. See IBM N series host software features on page 106. NFS NFS allows UNIX and Linux servers and clients access over an IP network using NFS file system protocols. To enable NFS support, you must purchase the appropriate feature code. See IBM N series host software features on page 106. iSCSI iSCSI allows transfer of data between storage and servers in block I/O formats (iSCSI protocol) across an IP network. iSCSI enables the creation of IP SANs for optimizing the transfer of database traffic in IP environments. To enable iSCSI, you must purchase the appropriate feature code. See IBM N series host software features on page 106. FCP FCP allows transfer of data between storage and servers in block I/O
89
formats utilizing FCP protocols across a Fibre Channel SAN. FCP enables participation of an N series storage solution within Fibre Channel SAN environments. To enable FCP, you must purchase the appropriate feature code. See IBM N series host software features on page 106. Following are descriptions of some of the Data ONTAP software packages available for N series storage systems as feature codes. Advanced Single Instance Storage This feature provides block-level deduplication within the entire flexible volume on an IBM N series storage controller that has the near-line Function feature enabled. Advanced Single Instance Storage only stores unique data blocks in the flexible volume and creates a small amount of additional metadata in the process. Each block of data has a digital "signature," that is compared to all other signatures in the flexible volume. If an exact byte-for-byte block match exists on the flexible volume, the duplicate block is discarded and its disk space is reclaimed. CFO Installed on a pair of N series storage controllers, this feature is designed to enable the transfer of data service from an unavailable controller to the other controller in the cluster. It is designed to deliver a robust and highly available data service for business-critical environments.
Disk Sanitization Disk sanitization is the process of physically obliterating data by overwriting disks with specified byte patterns or random data in a manner that helps prevent recovery of current data by any known recovery methods. This feature enables you to carry out disk sanitization by using three successive byte-overwrite patterns per cycle and a default six cycles per operation. Note: After the disk sanitization feature has been installed on an N series storage system, it cannot be uninstalled. FlexCache for NFS FlexCache for NFS is designed to create a caching layer in your storage infrastructure that helps to eliminate performance bottlenecks in NFS environments. It is designed to replicate hot data sets to local caching volumes anywhere in the infrastructure. This is useful with NFS implementations in compute-intensive applications, distributed computing environments, and reverse-tiered storage. FlexClone FlexClone enables near-instant replication of data volumes/sets without requiring additional storage space at the time of creation. FlexClone allows an IT administrator to make a backup copy of a database and then modify and run testing against the test (backup) database without affecting the online database and without taking the online database offline. iSCSI Protocol This feature enables the iSCSI Protocol licensed function, which is designed to provide connectivity to clients that transfer data via the iSCSI protocol. MetroCluster This feature is an integrated, high-availability, and business-continuance solution designed to leverage proven technologies from IBM. It expands the capabilities of the IBM N series portfolio of high-availability and disaster recovery solutionsa portfolio that includes failover, data replication, and
90
backup solutions. MetroCluster is designed to be a simple-to-administer solution that extends failover capability from within a data center to a remote site. It also provides replication of data at the primary site to a remote site, helping to keep data at the remote site current. The combination of failover and data replication aids in the recovery from disaster, helping prevent loss of data in less time than otherwise possible. Microsoft Exchange Bundle This Microsoft Exchange Bundle feature is designed to provide support for a specified number of Single Mailbox Recovery users. MultiStore MultiStore permits consolidating a large number of Windows and UNIX file servers onto a single storage system. MultiStore is designed to let you quickly and easily create separate, private logical partitions in filer network and storage resources. Each virtual storage partition is designed to maintain separation from every other storage partition to prevent different enterprise departments that share the same storage resources from accessing or finding other partitions. MultiStore helps prevent information on any virtual partition from being viewed, used, or downloaded by an unauthorized users. NearStore This feature is designed to help optimize an N series system for data protection and retention applications. It enables additional concurrent streams and SnapVault for NetBackup. SnapLock Compliance SnapLock Compliance provides data permanence storage that enables compliance with government records retention regulations by using SEC-compliant disk-based WORM technology. SnapLock Enterprise Like SnapLock Compliance, SnapLock Enterprise provides data permanence storage that enables compliance with government records retention regulations by using SEC-compliant disk-based WORM technology. SnapLock Enterprise allows administrators to delete SnapLock Enterprise volumes. SnapManager for Exchange SnapManager for Exchange is designed to help streamline storage management while simplifying configuration, backup, and restore operations for Microsoft Exchange databases. SnapManager for Hyper-V SnapManager for Hyper-V is designed to designed to integrate with the Microsoft Hyper-V virtual server infrastructure and automate crucial tasks such as back up, restore, recovery, and cloning. It allows connectivity of any number of Microsoft Hyper-V servers to one storage controller. SnapManager for Oracle SnapManager for Oracle is designed to integrate with an Oracle Database and automate crucial tasks such as back up, restore, database recovery, and cloning. SnapManager for SAP SnapManager for SAP is designed to allow SAP administrators to backup and restore a SAP system hosted on an Oracle database. It is integrated with the interface for SAP br* tools for backup and recovery of SAP
91
systems as well as with the N series data management tools. It is designed to simplify provisioning and data protection on enterprise SAP systems. SnapManager for SharePoint IBM SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint provides a single console to manage disk-based backup and recovery of SharePoint content databases, portals, sites, sub-sites, folders, documents, and versions of documents. Deployed in combination with an N series storage system, SnapManager software is designed to provide near-instantaneous hot backups and rapid restores to help you achieve a combination of availability, scalability, performance, and reliability for SharePoint environments. This feature allows connectivity of any number of Microsoft Office SharePoint servers to one N series storage system. SnapManager for SQL SnapManager for SQL is designed to help reduce backup and restore times of SQL databases by using backups based upon snapshot copies. SnapManager for SQL enables simultaneous backup of multiple databases using minimal disk space for each additional full backup. SnapManager for VI SnapManager for Virtual Infrastructures (SnapManager VI) is designed to integrate with a virtual server infrastructure and automate crucial tasks such as back up, restore, recovery, and cloning. It allows connectivity of any number of VMWare servers to one storage controller. SnapMirror SnapMirror provides remote mirroring software that enables automated file system replication between sites. SnapMirror enables asynchronous, synchronous, and semi-synchronous remote replication over inexpensive Internet protocols. Full backup is followed by incremental block updates. SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle This feature is a bundle of the SnapMirror and SnapVault Secondary features, designed to provide improved value for the combination. It is typically used by customers wanting to provide a mirrored, remote site for their data backup. This feature accomplishes that by having the SnapVault function create an initial, local backup copy of the data, and then having the SnapMirror function copy the data to a remote site. SnapVault Primary and SnapManager are not included in this bundle. SnapMover SnapMover provides a local data migration solution for optimizing workloads across N series systems sharing a common disk array. SnapMover allows you to migrate the ownership of a volume from one filer to another filer with a single command. This feature also allows for better resource utilization and performance amongst multiple N series systems. Note: MultiStore and Clustering are prerequisites for SnapMover. SnapRestore SnapRestore enables quick restoration of snapshot data files and volumes. It provides instant self-service volume recovery for large individual files. SnapRestore allows volumes to be restored with a single command (as opposed to the file level restorations that SnapShot offers). SnapValidator SnapValidator provides data validation and protection for Oracle data.
92
SnapVault Primary SnapVault Primary provides disk-based backup by periodically backing up a SnapShot copy to another system. SnapVault provides heterogeneous, super-efficient, hourly disk-based online backup and restoration by periodically backing up a snapshot copy to another system. SnapVault Primary is the license for the primary backup system in use. SnapVault Secondary Like SnapVault Primary, SnapVault Secondary provides disk-based backup by periodically backing up a SnapShot copy to another system. SnapVault Secondary is required to attain the license for the secondary backup device. SyncMirror SyncMirror provides data protection by maintaining two copies of data online; SyncMirror maintains strict physical separation between the two copies. This feature enables synchronous local mirroring from one volume to another volume attached to the same filer. SyncMirror includes volume mirroring between two clustered nodes.
Software packs
Software packs are designed to provide simplified ordering of common combinations of software features. The following software pack is available for N6040, N6060 and N6070 systems. Base pack This software pack provides the basic software functions for N series systems. It includes iSCSI, FCP, HTTP, SyncMirror, NearStore, Deduplication, and one license for Operations Manager. The following software packs are available for N3300, N3400, or N3600 systems. Base pack This software pack provides the basic software functions for N series systems. It includes iSCSI, FCP, HTTP, SyncMirror, NearStore, Deduplication, and one license for Operations Manager. Foundation pack This software pack provides the foundation for expanded use of the N series system. It includes SnapRestore, SnapVault Primary, and one node of Provisioning Manager. Protection pack This software pack provides the expanded protection software capabilities of the N series system. It includes SnapMirror, SnapVault Secondary, and one node of Protection Manager. Advanced pack This software pack provides the basis for the advanced functions of the N series system. It includes FlexClone, MultiStore, SnapLock Compliance, and SnapLock Enterprise. Application pack (for N3400 only) This software pack provides the basis for the application functions of the N series system. It includes SnapManager for Exchange - Filer, SnapManager for Oracle - Filer, SnapManager for SQL - Filer, SnapManager for SharePoint-Filer, SnapManager for SAP - Filer, SnapManager for VI - Filer, SnapDrive for UNIX - Filer, SnapDrive for Windows - Filer, SMBR Windows (1500pk for single-node systems, 3000pk for dual-node systems), and
93
ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO (enables 25 Windows systems for single-node systems, 50 for dual-node systems). Server pack (for N3400 only) This software pack provides the basis for the server functions of the N series system. It includes SnapManager for VI - Filer, SnapDrive for UNIX Filer, SnapDrive for Windows - Filer, and ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO.
Software bundles
Software bundles are designed to provide simplified ordering of common combinations of software features. The following software feature code bundles are available for N3300, N3400, or N3600 systems. v Windows bundle (N3300, N3400, N3600) This software bundle provides the foundation for expanded use of the N series system in a Windows environment. It includes: Storage system-based - CIFS - SnapRestore - SnapVault Primary - SnapVault Secondary - SnapMirror Host server-based - SnapManager for - SnapManager for - SnapManager for - SnapManager for Exchange - Filer SQL - Filer SAP - Filer Oracle - Filer
- SnapManager for Hyper-V - Filer - SnapManager for VI - Filer - SnapManager for SharePoint-Filer SnapDrive for UNIX - Filer SnapDrive for Windows - Filer one license per node of Protection Manager Provisioning Manager Data ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO SMBR Windows
v Virtualization bundle (N3300, N3400, N3600) This software bundle provides the expanded virtualization software capabilities of the N series system. It includes: Storage system-based - NFS - SnapRestore - SnapVault Primary - SnapVault Secondary - SnapMirror Host server-based - SnapManager for SAP - Filer
94
SnapManager SnapManager SnapManager SnapManager SnapManager
for for for for for
Oracle - Filer Exchange - Filer SQL - Filer Hyper-V - Filer VI - Filer
SnapDrive for UNIX - Filer SnapDrive for Windows - Filer one Provisioning Manager tier x one Protection Manager tier x licence Data ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO (the number of Windows systems varies by model) v Complete bundle (N3300, N3400, N3600) This software bundle provides the basis for the advanced functions of the N series system. It includes: Storage system-based - NFS - CIFS - SnapVault Primary - SnapVault Secondary - SnapMirror - FlexClone - MultiStore - SnapLock Compliance - SnapLock Enterprise Host server-based - SnapManager for Exchange - Filer SnapManager SnapManager SnapManager SnapManager for for for for SQL - Filer SAP - Filer Oracle - Filer Hyper-V - Filer
- SnapManager for VI - Filer - SnapManager for SharePoint - Filer - SnapDrive for UNIX - Filer - SnapDrive for Windows - Filer - one license per node of Protection Manager - Provisioning Manager - Data ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO - SMBR Windows The following software feature code bundles are available for N6040 systems. v Windows bundle (N6040) This software bundle provides the foundation for expanded use of the N series system in a Windows environment. It includes: Storage system-based - CIFS - SnapRestore - SnapVault Primary
95
- SnapVault Secondary - SnapMirror Host server-based - SnapManager for Exchange - Filer - SnapManager for SQL - Filer SnapManager for SAP - Filer SnapManager for Oracle - Filer SnapManager for Hyper-V - Filer SnapManager for VI - Filer SnapManager for SharePoint - Filer SnapDrive for UNIX - Filer SnapDrive for Windows - Filer
- one license per node of Protection Manager - Provisioning Manager - Data ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO - SMBR Windows v Virtualization bundle (N6040) This software bundle provides the expanded virtualization software capabilities of the N series system. It includes: Storage system-based - NFS - SnapRestore - SnapVault Primary - SnapVault Secondary - SnapMirror Host server-based - SnapManager for Hyper-V - Filer - SnapManager for VI - Filer - SnapDrive for UNIX - Filer - SnapDrive for Windows - Filer - one license per node of Provisioning Manager - Data ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO v Complete bundle (N6040) This software bundle provides the basis for the advanced functions of the N series system. It includes: Storage system-based - NFS CIFS SnapVault Primary SnapVault Secondary SnapMirror FlexClone MultiStore SnapLock Compliance SnapLock Enterprise
96
Host server-based - SnapManager for - SnapManager for - SnapManager for - SnapManager for -
Exchange - Filer SQL - Filer SAP - Filer Oracle - Filer
SnapManager for Hyper-V - Filer SnapManager for VI - Filer SnapManager for SharePoint - Filer SnapDrive for UNIX - Filer SnapDrive for Windows - Filer one license per node of Protection Manager Provisioning Manager
- Data ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO - SMBR Windows The following software feature code bundles are available for N6210 and N6240 systems. v Complete bundle (N6210 and N6240) This software bundle provides the basis for the advanced functions of the N series system. It includes: Storage system-based NFS CIFS FCP iSCSI
- SnapVault - SnapRestore - SnapMirror - FlexClone Host server-based - SnapManager for Exchange - Filer - SnapManager for SQL - Filer - SnapManager for SAP - Filer - SnapManager for Oracle - Filer - SnapManager for Hyper-V - Filer SnapManager for VI - Filer SnapManager for SharePoint - Filer SnapDrive for UNIX - Filer SnapDrive for Windows - Filer
97
IBM N series controller software feature codes

Table 58, Table 59 on page 99, Table 60 on page 101, Table 61 on page 103, Table 62 on page 104, and Table 63 on page 105 list the supported software features for all N series models.
Table 58. N series software licensed function indicators for N6210 and N6240 (Model 2858) Description Data ONTAP Essentials Data ONTAP Essentials - GW CIFS initial CIFS initial - GW CIFS secondary CIFS secondary - GW FCP initial FCP initial - GW FCP secondary FCP secondary - GW iSCSI initial iSCSI initial - GW iSCSI secondary iSCSI secondary - GW NFS initial NFS initial - GW NFS secondary NFS secondary - GW SnapLock Compliance SnapLock Compliance - GW SnapLock Enterprise SnapLock Enterprise - GW Data ONTAP Data ONTAP - GW SnapRestore SnapRestore - GW SnapMirror SnapMirror - GW SnapVault SnapVault - GW FlexClone FlexClone - GW SnapManager Suite SnapManager Suite - GW Complete Bundle N6210 2858 C10 5750 5775 5751 5776 5752 5777 5753 5778 5754 5779 5755 5780 5756 5781 5757 5782 5758 5783 5759 5784 5769 5794 5760 5785 5761 5786 5762 5787 5763 5788 5764 5789 5765 5790 5766 N6210 2858 C20 5700 5725 5701 5726 5702 5727 5703 5728 5704 5729 5705 5730 5706 5731 5707 5732 5708 5733 5709 5734 5719 5744 5710 5735 5711 5736 5712 5737 5713 5738 5714 5739 5715 5740 5716 N6240 2858 C21 5600 5625 5601 5626 5602 5627 5603 5628 5604 5629 5605 5630 5606 5631 5607 5632 5608 5633 5609 5634 5619 5644 5610 5635 5611 5636 5612 5637 5613 5638 5614 5639 5615 5640 5616 N6240 2858 E11 5650 5675 5651 5676 5652 5677 5653 5678 5654 5679 5655 5680 5656 5681 5657 5682 5658 5683 5659 5684 5669 5694 5660 5685 5661 5686 5662 5687 5663 5688 5664 5689 5665 5690 5666 N6240 2858 E21 5600 5625 5601 5626 5602 5627 5603 5628 5604 5629 5605 5630 5606 5631 5607 5632 5608 5633 5609 5634 5619 5644 5610 5635 5611 5636 5612 5637 5613 5638 5614 5639 5615 5640 5616
98
Table 58. N series software licensed function indicators for N6210 and N6240 (Model 2858) (continued) Description Complete Bundle - GW MetroCluster MetroCluster - GW Performance Acceleration Module II N6210 2858 C10 5791 N/A N/A 5768 N6210 2858 C20 5741 5717 5742 5718 5743 N6240 2858 C21 5641 N/A N/A 5618 5643 N6240 2858 E11 5691 N/A N/A 5668 5693 N6240 2858 E21 5641 5617 5642 5618 5643
Performance Acceleration Module II - 5793 GW
Table 59. N series software licensed function indicators for N6040, N6060, and N6070 (Model 2858) Description Base Pack Windows Bundle Virtualization Bundle Complete Bundle Data ONTAP Data ONTAP - GW Data ONTAP Data ONTAP - GW CIFS CIFS - GW HTTP HTTP - GW NFS NFS - GW CFO CFO - GW CFO for MetroCluster CFO for MetroCluster - GW FlexClone FlexClone - GW MultiStore MultiStore - GW SnapMirror SnapMirror - GW SnapLock Compliance SnapLock Compliance - GW SnapLock Enterprise SnapLock Enterprise - GW SnapMover SnapMover - GW SnapRestore 2858 A10 5301 5302 5303 5304 6800 6900 6800 6900 6801 6901 6802 6902 6803 6903 n/a n/a 6804 6904 6805 6905 6806 6906 6807 6907 6808 6908 6809 6909 n/a 6910 6811 2858 A20 5351 5352 5353 5354 6850 6950 6850 6950 7451 7551 7452 7552 7453 7553 7454 7554 n/a n/a 7455 7555 7456 7556 7457 7557 7458 7558 7459 7559 7460 7560 7461 2858 A11 n/a n/a n/a n/a 6101 6301 6101 6301 7401 7501 7402 7502 7403 7503 n/a n/a 7421 7521 7404 7504 7405 7505 7406 7506 7407 7520 7408 7507 n/a 7508 7409 2858 A21 n/a n/a n/a n/a 6201 6401 6201 6401 6051 6151 6052 6152 6053 6153 6054 6154 n/a n/a 6055 6155 6056 6156 6057 6157 6058 6158 6059 6159 6060 6160 6061 2858 A12 n/a n/a n/a n/a 6500 6600 6500 6600 6501 6601 6502 6602 6503 6603 n/a n/a 6504 6604 6505 6605 6506 6606 6507 6607 6508 6608 6509 6609 n/a n/a 6511 2858 A22 n/a n/a n/a n/a 6550 6650 6550 6650 6551 6651 6552 6652 6553 6653 6554 6654 n/a n/a 6555 6655 6556 6656 6557 6657 6558 6658 6559 6659 6560 6660 6561
99
Table 59. N series software licensed function indicators for N6040, N6060, and N6070 (Model 2858) (continued) Description SnapRestore - GW SnapVault Primary SnapVault Primary - GW SnapVault Secondary SnapVault Secondary - GW SyncMirror SyncMirror - GW FlexScale FlexScale - GW SnapValidator SnapValidator - GW Fibre Channel Protocol Fibre Channel Protocol - GW Disk Sanitization Disk Sanitization - GW SnapManager for Exchange SnapManager for Exchange GW SnapManager for SQL SnapManager for SQL - GW MetroCluster MetroCluster - GW SAN Bundle iSCSI Protocol iSCSI Protocol - GW MS Exchange Bundle (5000 users) SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle GW NearStore NearStore - GW Advanced Single Instance Storage Advanced Single Instance Storage - GW Performance Accelerator Module II Performance Accelerator Module II - GW SnapManager for SAP SnapManager for SAP - GW 2858 A10 6911 6812 6912 6813 6913 6816 6916 6817 6917 6818 6918 6819 6919 6820 6920 6821 6921 6822 6922 6823 6923 n/a 6825 6925 n/a 6829 6929 6831 6931 6832 6932 6833 6933 6838 6938 2858 A20 7561 7462 7562 7463 7563 7466 7566 7467 7567 7468 7568 7469 7569 7470 7580 7471 7570 7472 7571 7473 7573 7474 7475 7575 n/a 7479 7579 7481 7572 7482 7574 7483 7583 7488 7588 2858 A11 7509 7410 7510 7411 7511 7414 7514 7415 7515 7416 7516 7417 7517 7418 7530 7419 7518 7420 7519 7431 7523 n/a 7425 7525 n/a 7429 7529 7430 7522 7432 7524 7422 7526 7438 7538 2858 A21 6161 6062 6162 6063 6163 6066 6166 6076 6176 6067 6167 6068 6168 6069 6169 6070 6170 6071 6171 6073 6173 6074 6075 6175 6078 6079 6179 6072 6172 6082 6182 6077 6177 6088 6188 2858 A12 6611 6512 6612 6513 6613 6516 6616 6517 6617 6518 6618 6519 6619 6520 6620 6521 6621 6522 6622 6524 6624 n/a 6525 6625 n/a 6529 6629 6523 6623 6532 6632 6533 6633 6538 6638 2858 A22 6661 6562 6662 6563 6663 6566 6666 6567 6667 6568 6668 6569 6669 6570 6670 6571 6671 6572 6672 6576 6674 6574 6575 6675 n/a 6579 6679 6573 6673 6582 6682 6583 6683 6588 6688
100
Table 59. N series software licensed function indicators for N6040, N6060, and N6070 (Model 2858) (continued) Description SnapManager for Oracle SnapManager for Oracle - GW SnapManager for Hyper-V Filer 2858 A10 6839 6939 6841 2858 A20 7489 7589 7491 7591 7497 7597 7498 7598 7499 7599 2858 A11 7439 7539 7441 7541 7447 7547 7448 7548 7449 7549 2858 A21 6089 6189 6091 6191 6080 6180 6098 6198 6099 6199 2858 A12 6539 6639 6541 6641 6547 6647 6548 6648 6549 6649 2858 A22 6859 6689 6591 6691 6597 6697 6598 6698 6599 6699
SnapManager for Hyper-V - GW 6941 FlexCache for NFS FlexCache for NFS - GW SnapManager for VI SnapManager for VI - GW SnapManager for SharePoint SnapManager for SharePoint GW 6847 6947 6848 6948 6849 6949
Table 60. N series software licensed function indicators for N3300, N3400, N3600, and N3700 (Models 2859 to 2863) Description Base Pack Foundation Pack Protection Pack Advanced Pack Windows Bundle Virtualization Bundle Complete Bundle Application Pack Server Pack Data ONTAP CIFS HTTP NFS CFO SyncMirror SnapManager for Hyper-V FlexClone MultiStore NearStore iSCSI Protocol SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle FlexCache for NFS SnapMirror 2859 A10 2859 A20 2859 A11 2859 A21 2862 A10 5001 5002 5003 5004 5020 5021 5022 n/a n/a 6300 6302 6303 6304 n/a 6306 6307 6311 6320 6322 6325 6329 6330 6331 5051 5052 5053 5054 5070 5071 5072 n/a n/a 6350 6352 6353 6354 6355 6356 6357 6361 6370 6372 6375 6379 6380 6381 5201 5202 5203 5204 5220 5221 5222 5223 5224 6700 6002 7003 6004 n/a 7006 7050 7011 7020 7022 7025 7029 7030 7031 5251 5252 5253 5254 5270 5271 5272 5273 5274 6750 6102 7103 6104 6105 7106 7150 7111 7120 7122 7125 7129 7130 7131 5101 5102 5103 5104 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 7001 7002 7003 7004 n/a 7006 7050 7011 7020 7022 7025 7029 7030 7031 2862 A20 5151 5152 5153 5154 5170 5171 5172 n/a n/a 7101 7102 7103 7104 7105 7106 7150 7111 7120 7122 7125 7129 7130 7131 2863 A10 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 7000 7002 7003 7004 n/a n/a 7050 7011 7020 n/a 7025 7029 n/a 7031 2863 A20 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 7100 7102 7103 7104 7105 n/a 7150 7111 7120 n/a 7125 7129 n/a 7131
101
Table 60. N series software licensed function indicators for N3300, N3400, N3600, and N3700 (Models 2859 to 2863) (continued) Description SnapLock Compliance SnapLock Enterprise SnapMover SnapRestore SnapVault Primary SnapVault Secondary SnapManager for SAP SnapManager for Oracle SnapValidator Fibre Channel Protocol Disk Sanitization SnapManager for Exchange SnapManager for SQL Advanced Single Instance Storage SnapManager for VI SnapManager for SharePoint SnapDrive for UNIX SnapDrive for Windows Microsoft Exchange Bundle (2500 users)
1
2859 A10 2859 A20 2859 A11 2859 A21 2862 A10 63321 63331 n/a 6335 6336 6337 6338 6339 6342 6343 6344 6345 6346 6347 6348 6349 n/a n/a n/a 63821 63831 6384 6385 6386 6387 6388 6389 6392 6393 6394 6395 6396 6397 6398 6399 n/a n/a n/a 7032 7033 n/a 7035 7036 7037 7038 7039 6042 7043 7044 7045 7046 7047 7048 7049 7076 7077 n/a 7132 7133 7134 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 6142 7143 7144 7145 7146 7147 7148 7149 7176 7177 n/a 70321 70331 n/a 7035 7036 7037 7038 7039 7042 7043 7044 7045 7046 7047 7048 7049 7076 7077 n/a
2862 A20 71321 71331 7134 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 7142 7143 7144 7145 7146 7147 7148 7149 7176 7177 7178
2863 A10 70321 70331 n/a 7035 7036 7037 7038 7039 7042 7043 7044 7045 7046 n/a 7048 7049 n/a n/a n/a
2863 A20 71321 71331 7134 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 7142 7143 7144 7145 7146 n/a 7148 7149 n/a n/a n/a
SnapLock Compliance and SnapLock Enterprise require Data ONTAP 7.2.5 or later.
102
Table 61. N series software licensed function indicators for N5200 and N5500 (Models 2864 to 2865) Description Data ONTAP CIFS HTTP NFS CFO FlexClone MultiStore SnapMirror SnapLock Compliance SnapLock Enterprise SnapMover SnapRestore SnapVault Primary SnapVault Secondary SyncMirror SnapValidator Fibre Channel Protocol Disk Sanitization 2864 A10 7200 7201 7202 7203 n/a 7204 7205 7206 7207 7208 n/a 7209 7210 7211 7214 7216 7217 7218 2864 A20 7250 7251 7252 7253 7254 7255 7256 7257 7258 7259 7260 7261 7262 7263 7266 7268 7269 7270 7271 7272 7281 7273 7274 7275 7279 7282 7283 7284 7285 7291 7299 2864 G10 7300 7301 7302 7303 n/a 7304 7305 7306 n/a 7307 7308 7309 7310 7311 7314 7316 7317 7320
2
2864 G20 7350 7351 7352 7353 7354 7355 7356 7357 n/a 7359 7360 7361 7362 7363 7366 7368 7369 7367
2
2865 A10 7400 7401 7402 7403 n/a 7404 7405 7406 7407 7408 n/a 7409 7410 7411 7414 7416 7417 7418 7419 7420 7430 n/a n/a 7425 7429 7432 7438 7439 7448 7441 7449
2865 A20 7450 7451 7452 7453 7454 7455 7456 7457 7458 7459 7460 7461 7462 7463 7466 7468 7469 7470 7471 7472 7481 7473 7474 7475 7479 7482 7488 7489 7498 7491 7499
2865 G10 7500 7501 7502 7503 n/a 7504 7505 7506 n/a 7507 7508 7509 7510 7511 7514 7516 7517 7530
2
2865 G20 7550 7551 7552 7553 7554 7555 7556 7557 n/a 7559 7560 7561 7562 7563 7566 7568 7569 75802 7570 7571 7572 7573 n/a 7575 7579 75741 7588 7589 7598 7591 7599
SnapManager for Exchange 7219 SnapManager for SQL NearStore MetroCluster SAN Bundle iSCSI Protocol SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle Advanced Single Instance Storage SnapManager for SAP SnapManager for Oracle SnapManager for VI SnapManager for Hyper-V SnapManager for SharePoint
1 2
7318 7319 7322 n/a n/a 7325 7329 73241 7333 7334 7335 7341 7349
7370 7371 7372 7373 n/a 7375 7379 73741 7383 7384 7385 7391 7399
7518 7519 7522 n/a n/a 7525 7529 75241 7538 7539 7548 7541 7549
7220 7230 n/a n/a 7225 7229 7232 7233 7234 7235 7241 7249
Support for A-SIS on N series gateways requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or later. Disk Sanitization on N series gateways is only usable with N series storage expansion units.
103
Table 62. N series software licensed function indicators for N7600, N7700, N7800, and N7900 (Models 2866 to 2867) Description Data ONTAP CIFS HTTP NFS CFO FlexClone MultiStore SnapMirror SnapLock Compliance SnapLock Enterprise SnapMover SnapRestore SnapVault Primary SnapVault Secondary SyncMirror SnapValidator Fibre Channel Protocol Disk Sanitization SnapManager for Exchange SnapManager for SQL NearStore MetroCluster SAN Bundle iSCSI Protocol FlexScale Performance Accelerator Module II Performance Accelerator Module II bundle 2866 A10/A11 7600 7601 7602 7603 n/a 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 n/a 7611 7612 7613 7616 7617 7618 7619 7620 7621 7622 n/a n/a 7625 7626 7627 (A11 only) n/a 2866 2866 GW 2866 GW 2867 A20/A21 A10/A11 A20/A21 A10/A11 7650 7651 7652 7653 7654 7655 7656 7657 7658 7659 7660 7661 7662 7663 7666 7667 7668 7669 7670 7671 7672 7673 7674 7675 7676 7677 (A21 only) n/a 7678 7679 7680 7682 7688 7689 7691 7700 7701 7702 7703 n/a 7705 7706 7707 7708 7709 7710 7711 7712 7713 7716 7717 7718 7719 7720 7721 7722 n/a n/a 7725 7726 7727 (A11 only) n/a n/a 7729 7730 7732 7738 7739 7741
1
2867 2867 GW 2867 GW A20/A21 A10/A11 A20/A21 7850 7851 7852 7853 7854 7855 7856 7857 7858 7859 7860 7861 7862 7863 7866 7867 7868 7869 7870 7871 7872 7873 7874 7875 7876 7877 7900 7901 7902 7903 n/a 7905 7906 7907 7908 7909 7910 7911 7912 7913 7916 7917 7918 7919 7920 7921 7922 n/a n/a 7925 7926 7927
1
7750 7751 7752 7753 7754 7755 7756 7757 7758 7759 7760 7761 7762 7763 7766 7767 7768 7779 7770 7771 7772 7773 n/a 7775 7776 7777 (A21 only) n/a n/a 7779 7780 7782 7788 7789 7791
1
7800 7801 7802 7803 n/a 7805 7806 7807 7808 7809 n/a 7811 7812 7813 7816 7817 7818 7819 7820 7821 7822 n/a n/a 7825 7826 7827
7950 7951 7952 7953 7954 7955 7956 7957 7958 7959 7960 7961 7962 7963 7966 7967 7968 7979 7970 7971 7972 7973 n/a 7975 7976 7977
1
n/a n/a 7829 7830 7832 7838 7839 7841
7878 n/a 7879 7680 7882 7888 7889 7891
n/a n/a 7929 7930 7932 7938 7939 7941
7978 n/a 7979 7980 7982 7888 7889 7991
Microsoft Exchange Bundle n/a (10000 users) SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle FlexCache for NFS Advanced Single Instance Storage SnapManager for SAP SnapManager for Oracle SnapManager for Hyper-V 7629 7630 7632 7638 7639 7641
104
Table 62. N series software licensed function indicators for N7600, N7700, N7800, and N7900 (Models 2866 to 2867) (continued) Description SnapManager for VI SnapManager for SharePoint
1
2866 A10/A11 7648 7649
2866 2866 GW 2866 GW 2867 A20/A21 A10/A11 A20/A21 A10/A11 7698 7699 7748 7749 7798 7799 7848 7849
2867 2867 GW 2867 GW A20/A21 A10/A11 A20/A21 7898 7899 7948 7949 7998 7999
Disk Sanitization on N series gateways is only usable with N series storage expansion units.
Table 63. N series software licensed function indicators for N5600 and N5300 (Models 2868 to 2869) Description Data ONTAP CIFS HTTP NFS CFO FlexClone MultiStore SnapMirror SnapLock Compliance SnapLock Enterprise SnapMover SnapRestore SnapVault Primary SnapVault Secondary SyncMirror SnapValidator Fibre Channel Protocol Disk Sanitization SnapManager for Exchange SnapManager for SQL NearStore MetroCluster SAN Bundle iSCSI Protocol FlexScale 2868 A10 6000 7601 7602 7603 n/a 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 n/a 7611 7612 7613 7616 7617 7618 7619 7620 7621 7622 n/a n/a 7625 7626 2868 A20 6050 6051 6052 6053 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059 6060 6061 6062 6063 6066 6067 6068 6069 6070 6071 6072 6073 6074 6075 6076 6078 6079 6080 2868 G10 6100 7701 7702 7703 n/a 7705 7706 7707 n/a 7709 7710 7711 7712 7713 7716 7717 7718 7719 7720 7721 7722 n/a n/a 7725 7726 n/a 7729 7730
2
2868 G20 6150 6151 6152 6153 6154 6155 6156 6157 n/a 6159 6160 6161 6162 6163 6166 6167 6168 6169
2
2869 A10 6400 7401 7402 7403 n/a 7404 7405 7406 7407 7408 n/a 7409 7410 7411 7414 7416 7417 7418 7419 7420 7430 n/a n/a 7425 7415 n/a 7429 7447
2869 A20 6450 7451 7452 7453 7454 7455 7456 7457 7458 7459 7460 7461 7462 7463 7466 7468 7469 7470 7471 7472 7481 7473 7474 7475 7467 n/a 7479 7497
2869 G10 6200 7501 7502 7503 n/a 7504 7505 7506 n/a 7507 7508 7509 7510 7511 7514 7516 7517 7530
2
2869 G20 6250 7551 7552 7553 7554 7555 7556 7557 n/a 7559 7560 7561 7562 7563 7566 7568 7569 75802 7570 7571 7572 7573 n/a 7575 7567 n/a 7579 7597
6170 6171 6172 6173 n/a 6175 6176 n/a 6179 6180
7518 7519 7522 n/a n/a 7525 7515 n/a 7529 7547
Microsoft Exchange Bundle n/a (5000 users) SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle FlexCache for NFS 7629 7630
105
Table 63. N series software licensed function indicators for N5600 and N5300 (Models 2868 to 2869) (continued) Description Advanced Single Instance Storage Performance Accelerator Module II SnapManager for SAP SnapManager for Oracle SnapManager for Hyper-V SnapManager for VI SnapManager for SharePoint
1 2
2868 A10 7632 7633 7638 7639 7641 7648 7649
2868 A20 6082 6083 6088 6089 6091 6098 6099
2868 G10 77321 7733 7738 7739 7741 7748 7749
2868 G20 61821 6183 6188 6189 6191 6198 6199
2869 A10 7432 n/a 7438 7439 7441 7448 7449
2869 A20 7482 n/a 7488 7489 7491 7498 7499
2869 G10 75241 n/a 7538 7539 7541 7548 7549
2869 G20 75741 n/a 7588 7589 7591 7598 7599
Support for A-SIS on N series gateways requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or later. Disk Sanitization on N series gateways is only usable with N series storage expansion units.
IBM N series host software features

This section describes the host software features available for your N series storage system. Host software features are installed directly on the host that supports your N series storage system. Open Systems SnapVault Agents Open Systems SnapVault is designed to be a heterogeneous, disk-to-disk data protection solution. An OSSV primary system corresponds to a backup client in the traditional backup architecture. The SnapVault secondary system is always an N series system running Data ONTAP. OSSV software is designed to protect data residing on the primary system, which can be a storage system attached to a server running an operating system such as AIX, Windows, VMWare or Linux. Three main components are installed within the OSSV environment: v The primary system v The OSSV agent residing on the primary system v The secondary system (N series) with the SnapVault Secondary feature A predetermined directory or file system is chosen to be backed up to the secondary storage. The data set is mapped to a secondary system qtree on a secondary storage system. Operation Manager Core (OMC) The OMC features are designed to provide a central point of control and to provide alerts, reports, and configuration tools. These tools are designed to help manage storage and content delivery infrastructure, consistent with business requirements, and help maximize availability and reduce total cost of ownership. Protection Manager The Protection Manager feature provides backup and replication management software for an N series disk-based data protection environment. It is designed to help protect data and support high productivity by providing policy-based management, including when used in automated data protection configurations.
106
Protection Manager Disaster Recovery (DR) features The Protection Manager Disaster Recovery (DR) features provide backup and replication management software for an N series disk-based data protection environment and disaster recovery. Protection Manager DR is designed to help protect data and support high productivity by providing policy-based management, including when used in automated data-protection environments. Provisioning Manager Provisioning Manager is an automated, policy-based provisioning software for N series environments. The software is designed to automate manual and repetitive provisioning processes, increasing the productivity of administrators and improving the availability of data by ensuring that provisioned storage complies with data protection policies. Single Mailbox Recovery Single Mailbox Recovery (SMBR) adds advanced function to the SnapManager for Exchange feature. Single Mailbox Recovery restores individual mail items from any recent (hourly, daily, or weekly) snapshot. This helps allow rapid search of archived snapshot copies of previously deleted messages that are no longer in the current mailbox. Single Mailbox Recovery also includes Extract Wizards for Microsoft NT Backup, VERITAS Backup Exec, and, optionally, Extract Wizards for CA BrightStor ARCserve, Legato NetWorker, and VERITAS Net Backup. The Extract Wizards are designed to restore both private and public exchange information and stored data from tape or disk backups to any alternate location (machine, volume, or folder), thereby helping to eliminate the need for a recovery server. SMBR Administrative Server SMBR Administrative Server provides a framework that can host centralized services for multiple clients and provide both client and server support for Single Mailbox Recovery 5.0, or later and Single Mailbox Recovery ExtractWizard users. It facilitates server configuration, mailbox permissions, and application auditing services for SMBR environments. SMBR Content Analysis Wizard The SMBR Content Analysis Wizard (CAW) is designed to enable you to automate and save search results with Microsoft Exchange by selecting sources, including entire Exchange Database (EDB) files, individual mailboxes from an EDB, or folders from an EDB. Any number of sources is allowed. SnapDrive SnapDrive provides a software application designed to enhance the storage management capabilities in an operating system environment, including easier management of dynamic volume, cluster, snapshot, and replication management. SnapManager for SQL SnapManager for SQL is designed to help reduce backup and restore times of SQL databases by using backups based upon snapshot copies. SnapManager for SQL enables simultaneous backup of multiple databases using minimal disk space for each additional full backup. SnapManager for Exchange SnapManager for Exchange is designed to help streamline storage management while simplifying configuration, backup, and restore operations for Microsoft Exchange databases.
107
SnapManager for Hyper V SnapManager for Hyper-V is designed to designed to integrate with the Microsoft Hyper-V virtual server infrastructure and automate crucial tasks such as back up, restore, recovery, and cloning. It allows connectivity of any number of Microsoft Hyper-V servers to one storage controller. SnapManager for Oracle SnapManager for Oracle allows connection of one Oracle host server to a storage controller. SnapManager for Oracle for Windows IBM SnapManager for Oracle for Windows is designed to integrate with an Oracle database and automate crucial tasks such as backup, restore, database recovery, and cloning. This feature allows connection of one Oracle host server to a storage controller. One of this feature is required for each Oracle host. Snapmanager for Oracle for Windows is available for Oracle databases running on Windows. SnapManager for VI IBM SnapManager for Virtual Infrastructures (SnapManager VI) is designed to integrate with a virtual server infrastructure and automate crucial tasks such as back up, restore, recovery, and cloning in a VMWare environment.
Table 64. IBM N series host software Description SnapDrive for UNIX - AIX SnapDrive for UNIX - Solaris SnapDrive for UNIX - HP-UX SnapDrive for UNIX - Linux SnapDrive for Windows ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - Windows FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - AIX FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - Linux FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - HP-UX FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - Solaris FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - VMWare SnapManager for Oracle - Windows SnapManager for Exchange - Host SnapManager for VI - Host SnapManager for Hyper V - Host SnapManager for SAP - Windows SnapManager for SQL - Host SnapManager for Oracle SnapManager for SAP SnapManager for SharePoint SnapManager for SharePoint Management Bundle Single Mailbox Recovery 100 pk Single Mailbox Recovery 500 pk 8024 8025 8026 8027 8050 8052 8100 8110 8120 8121 8122 8123 8129 8131 8133 8135 8140 8141 8143 8145 8147 8149 8150 8151 Feature
108
Table 64. IBM N series host software (continued) Description Single Mailbox Recovery 1000 pk Single Mailbox Recovery 2500 pk Single Mailbox Recovery 5K pk Single Mailbox Recovery 10K pk Single Mailbox Recovery 50K pk Single Mailbox Recovery CA-ARCSERVE Extract Wizard Single Mailbox Recovery Tivoli Tape Extract Wizard Single Mailbox Recovery Legato Tape Extract Wizard Single Mailbox Recovery NetBackup Extract Wizard Single Mailbox Recovery PST Tape Extract Wizard Single Mailbox Recovery HP Extract Wizard Single Mailbox Recovery Commvault Galaxy Ex Wizard Single Mailbox Recovery UltraBac Extract Wizard Single Mailbox Recovery Agent for Advanced Search Single Mailbox Recovery Content Analysis Wizard Single Mailbox Recovery Content Administrative Server SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint Migrator 100 (host) SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint Migrator 250 (host) SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint Migrator 500 (host) SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint Migrator 1000 (host) SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint Migrator 5000 (host) SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint Archiver (host) OSSV Windows for Gateways OSSV Windows for Filers OSSV Linux for Gateways OSSV Linux for Filers OSSV OFM for Gateways OSSV OFM for Filers OSSV UNIX for Gateways OSSV UNIX for Filers OSSV VMWare for Gateways OSSV VMWare for Filers DataFabric Manager Server License Operations Manager Store Resource Management Operations Manager Core tier 1 license Operations Manager Core tier 2 license
Feature 8152 8153 8154 8155 8156 8158 8159 8160 8161 8162 8163 8164 8165 8166 8167 8168 8181 8182 8183 8184 8185 8186 8201 8202 8203 8204 8205 8206 8207 8208 8209 8210 8255 8257 8261 8262
109
Table 64. IBM N series host software (continued) Description Operations Manager Core tier 3 license Operations Manager Core tier 4 license Operations Manager Core tier 5 license Operations Manager Core tier 6 license Operations Manager Core tier 7 license Protection Manager tier 1 license Protection Manager tier 2 license Protection Manager tier 3 license Protection Manager tier 4 license Protection Manager tier 5 license Protection Manager tier 6 license Protection Manager tier 7 license Provisioning Manager tier 1 license Provisioning Manager tier 2 license Provisioning Manager tier 3 license Provisioning Manager tier 4 license Provisioning Manager tier 5 license Provisioning Manager tier 6 license Provisioning Manager tier 7 license Provisioning Manager DR tier 1 license Provisioning Manager DR tier 2 license Provisioning Manager DR tier 3 license Provisioning Manager DR tier 4 license Provisioning Manager DR tier 5 license Provisioning Manager DR tier 6 license Provisioning Manager DR tier 7 license Operations Manager for N3400 Protection Manager for N3400 Provisioning Manager for N3400 Protection Manager DR for N3400 8263 8264 8265 8266 8267 8268 8269 8270 8271 8272 8273 8274 8275 8276 8277 8278 8279 8280 8281 8282 8283 8284 8285 8286 8287 8288 8400 8401 8402 8403 Feature
110
Chapter 4. Site planning

This chapter contains the following information for site planning for the N series storage systems and storage expansion units. v System connectivity requirements v Circuit breaker and power outlet balancing requirements on page 114 v Connecting your system to an ASCII terminal console on page 116 v Hardware specifications on page 118
System connectivity requirements

Your system requires the following types of connections: Fibre Channel Connects your appliance to disk shelves, Fibre Channel switches, tape backup devices, and to other storage devices. They can connect through the following media: v Copper v Fiber Ethernet Connects your appliance to an Ethernet network through the following media: v Copper v Fiber
Fibre Channel connectivity

Your appliance connects to disk shelves, Fibre Channel switches, tape backup devices, and other storage through onboard ports or adapter ports. The following illustration shows a typical LC connector used to connect Fibre Channel devices.
F TA CP RG ET
PO
LC connector
RT
PO
RT
FI B CH RE AN N
EL
Figure 4. LC connector
111
Ethernet connectivity
Your appliance connects to a GbE network through either onboard ports or GbE network interface cards (NICs) which support either copper or fiber cabling. The following table lists maximum distances supported by 50 micron multimode fiber optic cables, with LC or SC connectors, connected to dual-port or quad-port Fibre Channel NICs.
Wavelength (Nanometers) 850 Core size (microns) 50 Modal Bandwidth (MHz/km) 500 Distance (Meters) 500 300 150 50 2000 860 500 270 150
Card (speed) 1 Gb 2 Gb 4 Gb 8 Gb 1 Gb 2 Gb 4 Gb 8 Gb
Copper GbE cabling and NICs: The cabling and network requirements are for GbE and 10GbE networks using copper cabling.
10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-TX NICs
AC T/L NK
PO RT A
AC T/L NK PO RT B
A AC T/L NK
RJ-45 connector
PO RT C
Copper cable Quad-port
AC T/L NK B 10 = 10 OFF 0= 10 GR 00 N =O RG
10 = 10 OFF 0= 10 GR 00 N =O RG
Dual-port Single-port
Figure 5. 10Base-T/100Base-T/1000Base-T NICs
Types: Single-port, dual-port, quad-port Connector type: RJ-45 for all Cable type: Category 5, Category 5E or Category 6 unshielded four-pair cable for 10/100-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-TX
112
Note: Category 5 cables that do not have four-pair wires do not work properly with 10/100-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-TX speed networks. Use Category 6 cables for these networks. Maximum distance: 100m Fiber GbE cabling and NICs: The following cabling and network requirements are for GbE networks using optical cabling.
1000Base-SX NICs
LC connector
AC T/L NK A
AC T/L NK
AC T/L NK B
Dual-port Single-port
Figure 6. 1000Base-SX NICs
The following table lists maximum distances supported by 50 or 62.5 micron multimode fiber optic cables, with LC or LC duplex connectors for the 1000BASE-SX NICs, connected to single-port or dual-port Fibre Channel GbE NICs.
Wavelength (Nanometers) MM laser 850 Core size (microns) 50 62.5 62.5 62.5 50 Modal Bandwidth (MHz/km) 500 160 200 200 2,000 Distance (Meters) 550 220 275 33 300
Card type 1000BASE-SX
Using older cables with PCI-X and PCIe 10GBASE-SR cards

Do not use less than the recommended 2,000 Mhz/km bandwidth for 10GBASESR cards. The following table lists maximum distances supported by some more common cable bandwidths.
Wavelength (Nanometers) 850 Core size (microns) 50 Modal Bandwidth (MHz/km) 2,000 Distance (Meters) 300
113
Circuit breaker and power outlet balancing requirements

NEMA If your equipment is mounted in a rack, the total number of circuit breakers required for your equipment is based on the current draw. You should not load a circuit beyond 80% of the rated limit for the circuit. For example, if you have a 20A circuit, you should load it to no more than 16A of draw. IEC If your equipment is mounted in a rack, the total number of circuit breakers required for your equipment is based on the current draw. For example, if you have a 16A circuit, you should load it to no more than 16A of draw. Attention: Overloading circuit breakers can lead to tripped breakers or power brownouts that can cause system errors.
Balancing the load across PDUs

A best practice is to plan how to distribute the total load across the PDU banks prior to plugging your system components into them. You should make each bank load as equal as possible. Keep the following considerations in mind when planning to balance the load: v Balancing the load depends on the number of components being connected and the location of the component power supply units (PSUs), as shown in the following illustrations. v You should connect the components to different PDUs on opposite sides of the system cabinet, using the illustrations for reference. v You should plug each component into the PDU outlet directly across from the component, using the illustrations for reference.
Examples of balancing the load with a single component

The following illustrations show three examples of connecting the PSUs of a single component, such as a controller in a single chassis, to the system cabinet PDUs.
2 1 3
Figure 7. PSUs on opposite sides of the component
114
2 1 3
Figure 8. PSUs on the same side of the component
1 2 4
3
Figure 9. PSUs stacked on the same side of the component 1 2 3 4 PSU 1 Left PDU outlet PSU 2 Right PDU outlet
Examples of balancing the load with two components

The following illustrations show three examples of connecting the PSUs of two components, such as a component with two controller modules in a single chassis or two components close together, to the system cabinet PDUs.
13
6 10
8 12
14
11
Figure 10. PSUs on opposite sides of the component
115
13
6 10
8 12
11
14
Figure 11. PSUs on the same side of the component
1 6 10
13
3 8 12
11
14
Figure 12. PSUs stacked on the same side of the component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Left PDU, bank A Left PDU, bank B Right PDU, bank A Right PDU, bank B PSU 1, component 1 Left PDU, bank A outlet PSU 2, component 1 Right PDU, bank A outlet PSU 1, component 2 Left PDU, bank B outlet PSU 2, component 2 Right PDU, bank B outlet Component 1 Component 2
Connecting your system to an ASCII terminal console

The ASCII terminal console enables you to monitor the boot process, helps you configure your system after it boots, and enables you to perform system administration.
116
ASCII terminal console wiring

The following table lists the RJ-45 connection pinout for the ASCII terminal console wiring.
Table 65. RJ-45 connection pinout for the ASCII terminal wiring Pin number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Connected to pin 8 Not connected TXD (from system) GND GND RXD (to system) Not connected Connected to pin 1
DB-9 to RJ-45 console adapter pin connections

You use the DB-9 to RJ-45 console adapter to connect the ASCII terminal console to your N6000 series system. Its purpose is to convert the RJ-45 pinout on the system to the DB-9 pinout, like those on other IBM products, and all PCs. The following table lists the console adapter pin number connections between the PC-style DB-9 male connector and the RJ-45 connection on your system.
Table 66. Console adapter pin number connections RJ-45 1 [not connected] 2 [not connected] 3 (connected to pin 3 on DB-9) 4 (connected to pin 5 on DB-9) 5 [not connected] 6 (connected to pin 2 on DB-9) 7 [not connected] 8 [not connected] RXD 2 (connected to pin 6 on RJ-45) [not connected] 1 [not connected] 4 [not connected] 6 through 9 TXD GND 3 (connected to pin 3 on RJ-45) 5 (connected to pin 4 on RJ-45) Signal DB-9 male
Connecting to an ASCII terminal console

To connect an ASCII terminal console to the system, complete the following steps. 1. Set the following communications parameters to the same values for both the N series system and ASCII terminal.
Table 67. Communication parameters Parameter Baud Setting 9600
117
Table 67. Communication parameters (continued) Parameter Data bit Parity Stop bits Flow control Setting 8 None 1 None
Note: See your terminal documentation for information about changing your ASCII console terminal settings. 2. Connect the DB-9 null modem cable to the DB-9 to RJ-45 adapter cable, and then connect the RJ-45 end to the console port on the system and the other end to the ASCII terminal.
Hardware specifications
The following sections list the hardware specifications for the following N series storage systems and storage expansion units: v v v v v N3300, N3400 and N3600 hardware specifications on page 119 N3700 hardware specifications on page 131 N5000 series system hardware specifications on page 133 N6000 series system hardware specifications on page 137 N6200 series hardware specifications on page 142
v N7000 series hardware specifications on page 145 v EXN1000 hardware specifications on page 148 v EXN2000 and EXN4000 hardware specifications on page 150 v EXN3000 hardware specifications on page 153
How the measurements are made

These published system measurements are conservative. The following assumptions, conditions, and observations apply to these measurements: v Line voltage is either 100V AC or 200V AC. v Current and power are steady state rms values. v Heat dissipation in BTU/hour is based on Watts multiplied by 3.4129. v Measurements are taken at room ambient. v Data is collected for each individual controller, controller module, or storage expansion unit, not for clustered systems or other combinations (except for platforms that have two controllers in one chassis). v Each controller or storage expansion unit is fully populated with a particular drive type and speed and exercised with multiple threads of a disk stress test program. v Controllers or controller modules with PCI slots are fully populated and are exercised with test program. v To account for customer work loads that exceed these conditions, the total system workload is calculated using random disk_qual to obtain electrical current, power, and heat dissipation values. v If the system configuration causes fan speed to increase or decrease, the data is collected in that mode. v Because fan speed can vary for a given set of conditions, the worst case set of numbers is presented.
118
v Electrical requirements for systems containing performance accelerator modules are measured with the maximum number of these modules installed in the system.
Converting watts to volt-amps (VA)

Use the following formula to calculate VA from watts: VA = Watts/PF PF = 0.95 Watts = Watts listed in the individual tables
Important information about ambient temperature

IBM N series systems have variable speed cooling fans. At higher ambient temperatures, the fans will spin faster and consume more power. This may counteract some energy savings anticipated by rasing the ambient temperature. You should operate your system within the ambient temperature range of 10-40 C. As the temperature increases, the reliability and life expectancy of electronics and hard disk drives decreases.
N3300, N3400 and N3600 hardware specifications

The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your hardware. CAUTION: Two people are required to lift the N3300 or N3400 system during installation. Three people are required to lift the N3600 system during installation. Note: Operating at the extremes of the environmental requirements might increase the risk of device failure.
Table 68. N3300, N3400 and N3600 system physical characteristics Weight 2859-A10, 2859-A20, 2859-A11, 2859-A21 Active/active (or high availability) controller with 12 SAS disk drives: 31.1 kg (68.6 lb) Single controller with no disk drives: 19.5 kg (43.0 lb) 2862-A10, 2862-A20 Active/active (or high availability) controller with 20 SAS disk drives: 51 kg (112 lb) Single controller with no disk drives: 32.6 kg (72 lb) Rack units 2859-A10, 2859-A20, 2859-A11, 2859-A21 2862-A10, 2862-A20 Height 2859-A10, 2859-A20, 2859-A11, 2859-A21 2862-A10, 2862-A20 Width All models 2U 4U 8.85 cm (3.5 in.) 17.75 cm (6.95 in.) 44.6 cm (17.6 in.)
119
Table 68. N3300, N3400 and N3600 system physical characteristics (continued) Depth 2859-A10, 2859-A20, 2859-A11, 2859-A21 2862-A10, 2862-A20 56.9 cm (22.4 in) 58.5 cm (23 in)
Table 69. N3300, N3400 and N3600 system clearance dimensions Front-cooling Rear-cooling Front-maintenance Rear-maintenance 10 in. (25.4 cm) 12 in. (30.5 cm) 30 in. (76.2 cm) 30 in. (76.2 cm)
Table 70. N3300, N3400 and N3600 system environmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range 50 F to 104 F (10 C to 40 C) Operating temperature recommended range 68 F to 77 F (20 C to 25 C) Nonoperating temperature range -40 F to 158 F (-40 C to 70 C) Relative humidity Recommended operating temperature relative humidity range Maximum wet bulb temperature Maximum altitude Acoustic level N3300, N3400 20 to 80% noncondensing 40 to 55% 28 C (82 F) 3050 m (10,000 ft.) 54 dBA @ 23 C 7.2 bels @ 23 C N3600 49 dBA @ 23 C 6.7 bels @ 23 C
Table 71 lists the maximum electrical power for the N3300, N3400 and N3600
Table 71. N3300, N3400 and N3600 maximum electrical power System N3300 and N3400 N3600 Maximum electrical power 100-240 V ac, 10-4 A, 50-60 Hz 100-240 V ac, 12-5 A, 50-60 Hz
Notes: 1. In the following tables, Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed, with power distributed over one power cord. Per PSU indicates typical power needs, per PSU, for a system operating under normal condition. System indicates typical power needs for two PSUs in a system operating under normal condition and power distributed over two power cords. 2. 600 GB SAS drives are supported for the N3300, N3400 and N3600. However, electrical requirements data for the 600 GB SAS drives are not currently available for the N3300 and N3600.
120
3. 2 TB SATA drives are supported for the N3300 and N3400. However, electrical requirements data for the 2 TB SATA drives are not currently available.
Table 72. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module 100 to 120V Input voltage Input current measured, A 144 GB SAS drives 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Input power measured, W 144 GB SAS drives 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Worstcase 3.83 Per PSU System 1.7 3.39 200 to 240V Worstcase 1.94 Per PSU System 0.94 1.87
4.44
1.95
3.89
2.23
1.08
2.16
4.44
1.95
3.89
2.23
1.08
2.16
3.22
1.55
3.09
1.68
0.81
1.61
3.37
1.61
3.22
1.69
0.83
1.66
3.37
1.61
3.22
1.69
0.83
1.66
377
165
330
371
174
348
439
191
381
431
204
407
439
191
381
431
204
407
319
151
301
322
147
294
332
158
316
327
152.5
305
332
158
316
327
152.5
305
121
Table 72. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module (continued) 100 to 120V Input voltage Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 144 GB SAS drives 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Worstcase 1287 Per PSU System 563 1125 200 to 240V Worstcase 1264 Per PSU System 593 1185
1497
649
1298
1470
669
1338
1497
649
1298
1470
669
1338
1088
514
1028
1099
501
1002
1133
539
1077
1114
520
1039
1133
539
1077
1114
520
1039
Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60 Table 73. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules 100 to 120V Input voltage Input current measured, A 144 GB SAS drives 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Worstcase 4.69 Per PSU System 2.05 4.09 200 to 240V Worstcase 2.34 Per PSU System 1.11 2.22
4.94
2.38
4.75
2.45
1.19
2.37
4.94
2.38
4.75
2.45
1.19
2.37
3.94
1.90
3.80
1.97
0.97
1.93
4.13
1.95
3.89
2.09
0.99
1.98
4.13
1.95
3.89
2.09
0.99
1.98
122
Table 73. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules (continued) 100 to 120V Input voltage Input power measured, W 144 GB SAS drives 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 144 GB SAS drives 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Worstcase 464 Per PSU System 200 400 200 to 240V Worstcase 452 Per PSU System 210 419
488
233
465
476
224
448
488
233
465
476
224
448
389
186
372
381
180
360
409
191
382
404
186
372
409
191
382
404
186
372
1583
683
1365
1542
714.5
1429
1665
794
1587
1624
715
1527
1665
794
1587
1624
715
1527
1328
634
1268
1298
614
1227
1395
651
1302
1377
634
1268
1395
651
1302
1377
634
1268
Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60 Table 74. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks 100 to 120V Input voltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Worstcase 1.67 165 Per PSU 0.8 77 System 1.60 153 200 to 240V Worstcase 0.9 160 Per PSU 0.45 75 System 0.89 149
123
Table 74. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks (continued) 100 to 120V Input voltage Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz Worstcase 563 Per PSU 261 System 521 200 to 240V Worstcase 544 Per PSU 253 System 506
50 to 60
Table 75. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks 100 to 120V Input voltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz Worstcase 2.63 254 866 Per PSU 1.12 108 366 System 2.23 215 731 200 to 240V Worstcase 1.34 240 818 Per PSU 0.59 104 355 System 1.18 208 709
50 to 60
Table 76. N3400 electrical requirements - one controller module 100 to 120V Input voltage Input current measured, A 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 600 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Worstcase 4.08 Per PSU System 1.98 3.96 200 to 240V Worstcase 2.3 Per PSU System 1 2
3.96
1.92
3.84
1.97
0.97
1.94
3.87
1.92
3.83
1.91
0.96
1.91
3.25
1.59
3.17
1.62
0.81
1.62
3.38
1.64
3.27
1.69
0.84
1.68
3.62
1.77
3.53
1.81
0.90
1.8
124
Table 76. N3400 electrical requirements - one controller module (continued) 100 to 120V Input voltage Input power measured, W 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SATA drives 600 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 600 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Worstcase 404 Per PSU System 194 387 200 to 240V Worstcase 392 Per PSU System 189 378
391
188
375
379
184
367
387
188
376
368
181
361
319
155
310
310
151
301
333
161
322
324
157
314
357
173
345
347
169
337
1378
660
1320
1337
645
1289
1333
640
1279
1292
626
1252
1319
641
1282
1254
616
1231
1088
529
1057
1057
513
1026
1136
549
1098
1105
536
1071
1217
589
1177
1183
575
1149
Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60
125
Table 77. N3400 electrical requirements - two controller modules 100 to 120V Input voltage Input current measured, A 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 600 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Input power measured, W 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 600 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Worstcase 4.85 Per PSU System 2.33 4.66 200 to 240V Worstcase 2.39 Per PSU System 1.18 2.35
4.70
2.27
4.53
2.32
1.14
2.28
4.44
2.16
4.32
2.18
1.09
2.18
3.95
1.92
3.84
1.97
0.98
1.95
4.10
1.99
3.98
2.04
1.01
2.01
4.36
2.12
4.23
2.16
1.06
2.12
480
229
457
464
224
447
464
223
445
451
216
432
440
212
424
425
208
415
390
188
376
379
184
367
405
195
389
393
191
381
4.29
207
414
416
202
403
126
Table 77. N3400 electrical requirements - two controller modules (continued) 100 to 120V Input voltage Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 600 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Worstcase 1637 Per PSU System 779 1558 200 to 240V Worstcase 1582 Per PSU System 762 1524
1582
759
1518
1538
737
1473
1500
723
1445
1449
708
1415
1330
641
1282
1292
626
1252
1381
664
1327
1340
650
1299
1463
706
1412
1419
687
1374
Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60 Table 78. N3400 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks 100 to 120V Input voltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz Worstcase 1.4 137 467 Per PSU 0.7 67 227 System 1.4 133 454 200 to 240V Worstcase 0.77 134 457 Per PSU 0.39 65 222 System 0.78 130 443
50 to 60
Table 79. N3400 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks 100 to 120V Input voltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Worstcase 1.96 192 655 Per PSU 0.98 94 319 System 1.95 187 638 200 to 240V Worstcase 1.02 188 641 Per PSU 0.52 91 311 System 1.04 182 621
127
Table 79. N3400 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks (continued) 100 to 120V Input voltage Input power frequency, Hz Worstcase 50 to 60 Per PSU System 200 to 240V Worstcase Per PSU System
Table 80. N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module 100 to 120V Input voltage Input current measured, A 144 GB SAS drives 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Input power measured, W 144 GB SAS drives 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Worstcase 5.64 Per PSU System 2.38 4.76 200 to 240V Worstcase 2.82 Per PSU System 1.33 2.65
6.62
2.96
5.92
3.27
2.76
5.52
6.62
2.96
5.92
3.27
1.38
2.76
4.64
2.18
4.36
2.33
1.09
2.17
5.07
2.26
4.51
2.46
1.20
2.40
5.07
2.26
4.51
2.46
1.20
2.40
560
233
465
547
251
502
658
292
583
636
262
523
658
292
583
636
266
523
459
213
425
447
204
408
504
220
439
474
224
447
504
220
439
474
224
447
128
Table 80. N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module (continued) 100 to 120V Input voltage Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 144 GB SAS drives 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Worstcase 1909 Per PSU System 794 1587 200 to 240V Worstcase 1864 Per PSU System 855 1710
2243
994
1988
2165
891
1782
2243
994
1988
2165
891
1782
1564
724
1448
1523
696
1392
1718
749
1497
1617
762
1523
1718
749
1497
1617
762
1523
Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60 Table 81. N3600 electrical requirements - two controller modules 100 to 120V Input voltage Input current measured, A 144 GB SAS drives 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Worstcase 6.31 Per PSU System 2.84 5.68 200 to 240V Worstcase 3.09 Per PSU System 1.45 2.89
7.51
3.34
6.68
3.73
1.71
3.41
7.51
3.34
6.68
3.73
1.71
3.41
5.74
2.84
5.67
2.89
1.33
2.65
5.91
2.74
5.74
2.97
1.39
2.77
5.91
2.74
5.47
2.97
1.39
2.77
129
Table 81. N3600 electrical requirements - two controller modules (continued) 100 to 120V Input voltage Input power measured, W 144 GB SAS drives 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 144 GB SAS drives 300 GB SAS drives 450 GB SAS drives 500 GB SATA drives 750 GB SATA drives 1 TB SATA drives Worstcase 628 Per PSU System 279 558 200 to 240V Worstcase 600 Per PSU System 275 550
747
330
659
728
328
655
747
330
659
728
328
655
567
277
554
561
252
503
585
268
536
575
262
524
585
268
536
575
262
524
2142
951
1902
2044
938
1876
2547
1124
2247
2483
1116
2232
2547
1124
2247
2483
1116
2232
1932
946
1891
1913
857
1714
1996
914
1827
1962
893
1785
1996
914
1827
1962
893
1785
Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60 Table 82. N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks 100 to 120V Input voltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Worstcase 2.10 205 Per PSU 0.90 86.5 System 1.80 173 200 to 240V Worstcase 1.10 198 Per PSU 0.50 84 System 0.99 168
130
Table 82. N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks (continued) 100 to 120V Input voltage Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz Worstcase 698 Per PSU 295 System 589 200 to 240V Worstcase 675 Per PSU 287 System 574
50 to 60
Table 83. N3600 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks 100 to 120V Input voltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz Worstcase 2.62 256 874 Per PSU 1.19 114 387 System 2.37 227 773 200 to 240V Worstcase 1.35 250 851 Per PSU 0.62 111 379 System 1.24 222 758
50 to 60
N3700 hardware specifications

The following tables list the physical characteristics and environmental requirements for your N3700 storage system. DANGER Three people are required to lift the N3700 during installation. Do not remove the disk drives to reduce the weight.
Note: Operating at the extremes of the environmental requirements might increase the risk of device failure.
Table 84. N3700 physical characteristics Weight With maximum number of disk drives Empty Rack units Height Width Depth Table 85. N3700 clearance dimensions Front-cooling All versions 6 in. (15.3 cm) 78.8 lb (35.8 kg) 50.6 lb (23 kg) 3U 5.25 in. (13.3 cm) 17.6 in. (44.8 cm) 20 in. (50.9 cm)
131
Table 85. N3700 clearance dimensions (continued) Rear-cooling Rear-maintenance All versions All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm) 12 in. (30.5 cm)
Table 86. N3700 environmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range 50 F to 104 F (10 C to 40 C) Operating temperature recommended range 68 F to 77 F (20 C to 25 C) Nonoperating temperature range -40 F to 149 F (-40 C to 65 C) Relative humidity Recommended operating temperature relative humidity range Maximum wet bulb temperature Maximum altitude Acoustic level
1, 4 2, 3
10 to 90% noncondensing 40 to 55% 28 C (82 F) 3050 m (10,000 ft.) 56.4 dBA @ 23 C 5.64 bels @ 23 C
1. Noise emission notes: a. LWAd is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines. b. LpAm is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator position (if any) for a production series of machines. c. <LpA>m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at the one-meter positions for a production series of machines. d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position). e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4. f. N/A - not available. 2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1 C per 137 m (450 ft) above 915 m (3000 ft). 3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1 C per 274 m (900 ft) above 305 m (1000 ft). 4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor. 5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance with ISO 9296. Table 87. N3700 electrical requirements 100 to 120V Typical single PSU/ system 1.88/3.76 2.15/4.30 187.5/375 214.5/429 200 to 240V Typical single PSU/ system 0.92/1.83 1.04 177.5/355 202.5/405
Input voltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W
Disk drives 10K drives 15K drives 10K drives 15K drives
Worst-case 3.12 3.83 311 382
Worst-case 1.52 1.83 299 361
132
Table 87. N3700 electrical requirements (continued) 100 to 120V Typical single PSU/ system 639.5/1279 731.5/1463 200 to 240V Typical single PSU/ system 606/1212 690/1380
Input voltage
Disk drives
Worst-case 1062 1302 50 to 60
Worst-case 1020 1230
Thermal dissipation, 10K drives BTU/hr 15K drives Input power frequency, Hz
Note: Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed. Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.
N5000 series system hardware specifications

The following tables list the hardware characteristics and environmental and electrical requirements for N5000 series systems. DANGER The weight of this part or unit is between 32 and 55 kg (70.5 and 121.2 lb). It takes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010)
32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)
Table 88. N5000 series physical characteristics Weight 2864-A10, 2864-G10, 2865-A10, 2865-G10, 2868-A10, 2868-G10, 2869-A10, 2869-G10 2864-A20, 2864-G20, 2865-A20, 2865-G20, 2868-A20, 2868-G20, 2869-A20, 2869-G20 Rack units 2864-A10, 2864-G10, 2865-A10, 2865-G10, 2868-A10, 2868-G10, 2869-A10, 2869-G10 2864-A20, 2864-G20, 2865-A20, 2865-G20, 2868-A20, 2868-G20, 2869-A20, 2869-G20 Height 2864-A10, 2864-G10, 2865-A10, 2865-G10, 2868-A10, 2868-G10, 2869-A10, 2869-G10 2864-A20, 2864-G20, 2865-A20, 2865-G20, 2868-A20, 2868-G20, 2869-A20, 2869-G20 75 lb (34 kg)
svc00168
150 lb (68 kg)
3U
6U
5.12 in. (13 cm)
10.2 in. (26 cm)
133
Table 88. N5000 series physical characteristics (continued) Width Depth All models All models 17.7 in. (44.9 cm) 61 cm (24 in) without cable management tray 76.2 cm (30 in) with cable management tray Table 89. N5000 series clearance dimensions Front-cooling Rear-cooling Rear-maintenance 6 in. (15.3 cm) 12 in. (30.5 cm) 12 in. (30.5 cm)
Table 90. N5000 series environmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range 50 F to 104 F (10 C to 40 C) Operating temperature recommended range 68 F to 77 F (20 C to 25 C) Nonoperating temperature range -40 F to 65 F (-40 C to 65 C) Relative humidity Recommended operating temperature relative humidity range Maximum wet bulb temperature Maximum altitude Acoustic level1, 4
2, 3
5 to 95% noncondensing 40 to 55% 28 C (82 F) 3050 m (10,000 ft.) 54 dBA @ 23 C 5.4 bels @ 23 C
1. Noise emission notes: a. LWAd is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines. b. LpAm is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator position (if any) for a production series of machines. c. <LpA>m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at the one-meter positions for a production series of machines. d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position). e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4. f. N/A - not available. 2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1 C per 137 m (450 ft) above 915 m (3000 ft). 3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1 C per 274 m (900 ft) above 305 m (1000 ft). 4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor. 5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.
In the following tables, worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed. Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.
134
Table 91. N5200 electrical requirements 100 to 120V Typical single PSU/ system 1.2/2.4 118/236 402.5/805 200 to 240V Typical single PSU/ system 0.71/1.40 115/229 392/783 -40 to -60V Typical single PSU/ system 2.85/5.70 113/226 286/771
Input voltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz
Worstcase 3.39 336 1144
Worstcase 1.77 329 1122
Worstcase 8.2 328 1118
50 to 60
n/a
n/a
Table 92. N5300 electrical requirements 100 to 120V Typical single PSU/ system 1.7/3.4 169/228 576/1152 200 to 240V Typical single PSU/ system 0.95/1.9 165/330 564/1127 -40 to -60V Typical single PSU/ system 3.7/7.4 148/296 506/1011
Worstcase 3.66 363 1238
Worstcase 1.9 358 1221
Worstcase 7.94 318 1084
50 to 60
n/a
n/a
Table 93. N5300 electrical requirements with one Performance Accelerator Module card 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 4.21 418 1425 Typical single PSU/ system 1.82/3.63 178/355 606/1212 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU 2.21 417 1422 Typical single PSU/ system 1.04/2.07 175/350 597/1193 -40 to -60V Worstcase, single PSU 9.74 389 1328 Typical single PSU/ system 4.12/8.21 164/328 560/1119
50 to 60
n/a
n/a
135
Worstcase 3.88 386 1317
Worstcase 2.04 384 1309
Worstcase 9.49 380 1295
50 to 60
n/a
n/a
Worstcase 4.03 400 1365
Worstcase 2.06 387 1320
Worstcase 10.57 423 1442
50 to 60
n/a
n/a
Table 96. N5600 electrical requirements with two Performance Accelerator Module cards 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 4.51 449 1530 Typical single PSU/ system 2.04/4.08 201/402 685/1369 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU 2.29 438 1493 Typical single PSU/ system 1.22/2.43 208/415 707/1414 -40 to -60V Worstcase, single PSU 10.67 427 1455 Typical single PSU/ system 4.63/9.26 185/370 632/1263
50 to 60
n/a
n/a
136
N6000 series system hardware specifications
32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)
DANGER The weight of this part or unit is between 44 and 54 kg (97 and 118 lb). It takes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010)
The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for the N6000 series system. Note: Operating at the extremes of the environmental requirements might increase the risk of device failure.
Table 97. N6000 series physical characteristics Weight v A10: 44.4 kg (97.8 lb) v A20: 52.2 kg (115 lb) v A11: 44.9 kg (99 lb) v A21: 53.2 kg (117.3 lb) v A12: 44.8 kg (98.8 lb) v A22: 53.1 kg (117 lb) Rack units Height Width Depth 6U 25.9 cm (10.2 in.) 44.7 cm (17.6 in.) 61.7 cm (24.3 in.) without cable tray 71.3 cm (28.1 in.) with cable tray Table 98. N6000 series clearance dimensions Front-cooling Rear-cooling Front-maintenance Rear-maintenance All versions All versions All versions All versions 15.2 cm (6 in.) 30.5 cm (12 in.) 76.2 cm (30 in.) 91.4 cm (36 in.)
Table 99. N6000 series environmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range 50 F to 104 F (10 C to 40 C) Operating temperature recommended range 68 F to 77 F (20 C to 25 C) Nonoperating temperature range -40 F to 149 F (-40 C to 65 C)
svc00168
137
Table 99. N6000 series environmental requirements (continued) Relative humidity Recommended operating temperature relative humidity range Maximum wet bulb temperature Maximum altitude Acoustic level 20 to 80% noncondensing 40 to 55% 28 C (82 F) 3050 m (10,000 ft.) 56 dBA @ 23 C 7.4 bels @ 23 C
The following tables list the maximum electrical power for the N6000 series systems and the electrical requirements for different configurations of the N6000 series systems.
Table 100. N6000 series systems maximum electrical power System N6000 series systems Maximum electrical power 100-240 V ac, 12-8 A, 47-63 Hz
In the following tables, worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed. Typical per PSU/System, two PSUs indicates a system running one PSU on one circuit and a system running two PSUs on two circuits.
Table 101. N6040 electrical requirementsone controller module 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 3.98 396 1350 Typical Per PSU 1.89 187 636 200 to 240V Worstcase, System, single two PSUs PSU 3.77 373 1272 1.97 385 1313 Typical Per PSU 0.97 183 625 System, two PSUs 1.93 366 1249
50 to 60
Table 102. N6040 electrical requirementstwo controller modules 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 7.38 736 Typical Per PSU 2.99 297 200 to 240V Worstcase, System, single two PSUs PSU 5.97 594 3.60 712 Typical Per PSU 1.49 291 System, two PSUs 2.98 581
138
Table 102. N6040 electrical requirementstwo controller modules (continued) 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 2509 Typical Per PSU 1013 200 to 240V Worstcase, System, single two PSUs PSU 2026 2427 Typical Per PSU 991 System, two PSUs 1981
Input voltage Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz
50 to 60
Table 103. N6040 electrical requirements with two PAM I or II cardsone controller module 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 4.06 402 1372 Typical Per PSU 1.93 192 654 200 to 240V Worstcase, System, single two PSUs PSU 3.86 383 1307 2.01 396 1352 Typical Per PSU 0.99 190 647 System, two PSUs 1.98 379 1293
50 to 60
Table 104. N6040 electrical requirements with four PAM I or II cardstwo controller modules 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 7.69 769 2625 Typical Per PSU 3.29 328 1117 200 to 240V Worstcase, System, single two PSUs PSU 6.58 655 2234 3.75 745 2543 Typical Per PSU 1.58 315 1075 System, two PSUs 3.15 630 2150
50 to 60
139
50 to 60
Table 106. N6060 electrical requirementstwo controller modules Input voltage 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 9.25 916 3126 Typical Per PSU 3.88 380 1297 System, two PSUs 7.76 760 2594 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU 4.40 860 2935 Typical Per PSU 2.15 419 1430 System, two PSUs 4.30 838 2860
50 to 60
Table 107. N6060 electrical requirements with two PAM I or II cardsone controller module 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 4.90 487 1662 Typical Per PSU 2.31 227 773 200 to 240V Worstcase, System, single two PSUs PSU 4.62 453 1546 2.44 478 1631 Typical Per PSU 1.19 230 785 System, two PSUs 2.38 460 1570
50 to 60
140
Table 108. N6060 electrical requirements with four PAM I or II cardstwo controller modules 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 9.65 959 3273 Typical Per PSU 4.09 405 1381 200 to 240V Worstcase, System, single two PSUs PSU 8.17 809 2761 4.51 890 3037 Typical Per PSU 2.28 441 1505 System, two PSUs 4.55 882 3010
50 to 60
50 to 60
Table 110. N6070 electrical requirementstwo controller modules 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 9.74 969 3305 Typical Per PSU 4.07 405 1381 200 to 240V Worstcase, System, single two PSUs PSU 8.14 810 2761 4.69 930 3170 Typical Per PSU 2.02 394 1343 System, two PSUs 4.03 788 2686
50 to 60
141
Table 111. N6070 electrical requirements with four PAM I or II cardsone controller module 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 5.27 525 1790 Typical Per PSU 2.49 247 843 200 to 240V Worstcase, System, single two PSUs PSU 4.98 494 1685 2.62 513 1749 Typical Per PSU 1.25 241 822 System, two PSUs 2.5 482 1644
50 to 60
Table 112. N6070 electrical requirements with eight PAM I or II cardstwo controller modules 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 10.54 1048 3574 Typical Per PSU 4.49 447 1525 200 to 240V Worstcase, System, single two PSUs PSU 8.98 894 3049 5.08 1006 3430 Typical Per PSU 2.22 434 1480 System, two PSUs 4.44 868 2960
50 to 60
N6200 series hardware specifications

The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your hardware.
32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)
DANGER The weight of this part or unit is between 32 and 55 kg (70.5 and 121.2 lb). It takes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010)
142
svc00168
Table 113. N6200 series physical characteristics Weight v 2858-C10 (single enclosure with one controller): 29.7.kg (65.4 lb) v 2858-C20 and 2858-C21 (single enclosure with two controllers): 34.6 kg (76.2 lb) v 2858-E11 (single enclosure with one controller and one IOXM): 32.9 kg (72.6lb) v 2858-E21 (two enclosures, each with one controller and one IOXM): 65.9 kg (145.2 lb) Rack units Height Width Depth 3U per enclosure 13 cm (5.12 in.) 44.7 cm (17.6 in.) 61 cm (24 in.) without bezel 64.5 cm (25.4 in.) with beze1
Table 114. N6200 series clearance dimensions Airflow Front Rear Service Front Rear 25.4 cm (10 in.) 30.5 cm (12 in.) 76.2 cm (30.5 in.) 76.2 cm (30.5 in.)
Table 115. N6200 series environmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range Operating temperature recommended range Nonoperating temperature range Operating relative humidity Nonoperating relative humidity Recommended operating temperature relative humidity range Maximum wet bulb temperature Maximum altitude Acoustic level 50 F to 104 F (10 C to 40 C) 68 F to 77 F (20 C to 25 C) -40 F to 158 F (-40 C to 70 C) 20 to 80% noncondensing 10 to 95% noncondensing (in original container) 40 to 55% 28 C (82 F) 3050 m (10,000 ft.) 55.5 dBA, 7.5 bels at 23 C
The following tables list the maximum electrical power for the N6200 series systems and the electrical requirements for different configurations of the N6200 series systems.
Table 116. N6200 series systems maximum electrical power System N6200 series systems Maximum electrical power 100-240 V ac, 12-8 A, 50-60 Hz.
143
In the following tables, Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed. Typical Per PSU/System, two PSUs indicates a system running one PSU on one circuit and a system running two PSUs on two circuits.
Table 117. N6210 electrical requirementsone controller node, with one 256-Gb and one 512-Gb Flash Cache module 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 4.22 421 1437 Typical Per PSU 1.52 150 511 200 to 240V Worstcase, System, single two PSUs PSU 3.03 299 1021 1.97 411 1403 Typical Per PSU 0.8 146 499 System, two PSUs 1.6 292 997
50 to 60
Table 118. N6210 electrical requirementstwo controller nodes, with one 256-Gb Flash Cache module per node 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 6.27 626 2137 Typical Per PSU 2.32 231 789 200 to 240V Worstcase, System, single two PSUs PSU 4.64 462 1577 2.91 610 2082 Typical Per PSU 1.13 225 768 System, two PSUs 2.25 450 1536
50 to 60
Table 119. N6240 electrical requirementstwo controller nodes, with one 256-Gb and one 512-Gb Flash Cache module per controller node 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 6.37 635 Typical Per PSU 2.35 233 200 to 240V Worstcase, System, single two PSUs PSU 4.70 466 2.94 618 Typical Per PSU 1.14 228 System, two PSUs 2.27 455
144
Table 119. N6240 electrical requirementstwo controller nodes, with one 256-Gb and one 512-Gb Flash Cache module per controller node (continued) 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 2168 Typical Per PSU 796 200 to 240V Worstcase, System, single two PSUs PSU 1591 2110 Typical Per PSU 777 System, two PSUs 1553
Input voltage Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz
50 to 60
Table 120. N6240 electrical requirementsone controller node, with one 256-Gb and one 512-Gb Flash Cache module, and one I/O expansion module 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 5.01 500 1707 Typical Per PSU 1.86 184 628 200 to 240V Worstcase, System, single two PSUs PSU 3.71 368 1256 2.33 487 1663 Typical Per PSU 0.94 180 613 System, two PSUs 1.87 359 1226
50 to 60
N7000 series hardware specifications
32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)
The following tables list the hardware characteristics and environmental and electrical requirements for N7000 series systems. DANGER The weight of this part or unit is between 32 and 55 kg (70.5 and 121.2 lb). It takes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010)
svc00168
145
Table 121. N7000 series system physical characteristics Weight 2866-A11, 2867-A11 2866-A21, 2867-A21 Rack units 2866-A11, 2867-A11 2866-A21, 2867-A21 Height 2866-A11, 2867-A11 2866-A21, 2867-A21 Width Depth 54.8 kg (121 lb) 109.6 kg (242 lb) 6U 12U 263 mm (10.4 in) 526 mm (20.8 in) 446 mm (17.6 in) 695 mm (27.4 in) without cable management tray 782 mm (30.8 in) with cable management tray
Table 122. N7000 series system clearance dimensions Front-cooling Front-maintenance Rear-cooling Rear-maintenance All versions All versions All versions All versions 6 in. (15.2 cm) 25 in. (63.5 cm) 12 in. (30.5 cm) 40 in. (102 cm)
Table 123. N7000 series system environmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range Operating temperature recommended range Nonoperating temperature range Relative humidity Recommended operating temperature relative humidity range Maximum wet bulb temperature Maximum altitude,2 3 Acoustic level1, 4 50 F to 104 F (10 C to 40 C) 68 F to 77 F (20 C to 25 C) -40 F to 149 F (-40 C to 65 C) 10 to 90% noncondensing 40 to 55% 28 C (82 F) 2133 m (7,000 ft.) 49 dBA @ 23 C 5 bels @ 23 C
146
Table 123. N7000 series system environmental requirements (continued) 1. Noise emission notes: a. LWAd is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines. b. LpAm is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator position (if any) for a production series of machines. c. <LpA>m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at the one-meter positions for a production series of machines. d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position). e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4. f. N/A - not available. 2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1 C per 137 m (450 ft) above 915 m (3000 ft). 3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1 C per 274 m (900 ft) above 305 m (1000 ft). 4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor. 5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.
In the following tables, worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed. Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.
Table 124. N7600 and N7700 electrical requirements 100 to 120V Input voltage Worst-case 200 to 240V Typical single PSU/system Worst-case 2.75/5.4 266/531 906/1812 4.6 882 3008 Typical single PSU/system 1.4/2.8 255/509 869/1737
Input current measured, 9.26 A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 922 3144 50 to 60
Table 125. N7600 and N7700 electrical requirements with four Performance Accelerator Module I or II cards 100 to 120V Input voltage Worst-case, single PSU 200 to 240V Typical single Worst-case, PSU/system single PSU 3.03/6.05 293/585 998/1996 5.06 969 3305 Typical single PSU/system 1.65/3.29 289/578 985/1969
147
Table 126. N7800 and N7900 electrical requirements 100 to 120V Input voltage Worst-case 200 to 240V Typical single PSU/system Worst-case 2.8/5.6 274/548 935/1870 4.84 928 3166 Typical single PSU/system 1.45/2.9 266/532 908/1816
Table 127. N7800 and N7900 electrical requirements with five Performance Accelerator Module I or II cards 100 to 120V Input voltage Worst-case, single PSU 200 to 240V Typical single Worst-case, PSU/system single PSU 3.85/7.70 376/752 1283/2566 5.97 1158 3950 Typical single PSU/system 2.07/4.14 368/736 1255/2509
EXN1000 hardware specifications

The following table lists the characteristics and requirements for the EXN1000 storage expansion unit. The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your hardware. DANGER Three people are required to lift the EXN1000 during installation.
Table 128. EXN1000 physical characteristics Weight With maximum number of disk drives Empty Rack units Height Width Depth 68 lbs (30.8 kg) 50.6 lbs (23 kg) 3 5.25 in. (13.3 cm) 17.6 in. (44.7 cm) 22 in. (55.2 cm)
148
Table 129. EXN1000 clearance dimensions Frontcooling Rearcooling and maintenance Frontmaintenance Table 130. EXN1000 environmental requirements Operating temperature range 41 F to 104 F (5 C to 40 C) Nonoperating temperature range -40 F to 140 F (-40 C to 60 C) Relative humidity Acoustic level
1, 4
6 in. (15.3 cm) 12 in. (30.5) 25 in. (55.9 cm)
10 to 80% noncondensing 58 dBA @ 23 C
1. Noise emission notes: a. LWAd is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines. b. LpAm is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator position (if any) for a production series of machines. c. <LpA>m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at the one-meter positions for a production series of machines. d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position). e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4. f. N/A - not available. 2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1 C per 137 m (450 ft) above 915 m (3000 ft). 3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1 C per 274 m (900 ft) above 305 m (1000 ft). 4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor. 5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance with ISO 9296. Table 131. EXN1000 electrical requirements (7.2K speed drives, HE PSUs) 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU 2.72 2.51 2.50 271 250 249 924 853 849 1.24 1.19 1.17 124 119 115 421 404 392 Typical System, two PSUs 2.48 2.38 2.34 247 237 230 842 808 784 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU 1.28 1.22 1.28 254 243 246 866 829 839 0.61 0.59 0.61 120 117 107 410 398 365 Typical System, two PSUs 1.21 1.17 1.21 240 233 214 819 795 730
Input voltage Input current measured, A
Size (GB) 750 GB 1 TB 2 TB
Input power measured, W
750 GB 1 TB 2 TB
Thermal 750 GB dissipation, BTU/hr 1 TB 2 TB
149
Table 132. EXN1000 electrical requirements (7.2K speed drives) 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU 2.79 2.85 2.94 3.42 3.15 279 284 293 341 315 953 968 998 1163 1073 1.36 1.56 1.45 1.61 1.55 136 155 144 161 154 462 529 492 548 525 Typical System, two PSUs 2.72 3.12 2.9 3.22 3.10 271 310 288 321 308 923 1058 983 1095 1050 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU 1.38 1.43 1.43 1.63 1.55 271 283 286 323 309 923 964 975 1103 1054 0.70 0.78 0.74 0.53 0.78 132 152 142 155 150 450 518 482 527 512 Typical System, two PSUs 1.39 1.56 1.47 1.60 1.56 264 304 283 309 300 900 1035 964 1054 1024
Size (GB) 250 GB 320 GB 500 GB 750 GB 1 TB
250 GB 320 GB 500 GB 750 GB 1 TB
Thermal 250 GB dissipation, BTU/hr 320 GB 500 GB 750 GB 1 TB
EXN2000 and EXN4000 hardware specifications

The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your EXN2000 or EXN4000 storage expansion unit. DANGER Three people are required to lift the EXN2000 or EXN4000 during installation.
Table 133. EXN2000 and EXN4000 physical characteristics Weight With maximum number of disk drives Empty Rack units Height Width Depth Table 134. EXN2000 and EXN4000 clearance dimensions Frontcooling Rearcooling and maintenance Frontmaintenance 6 in. (15.3 cm) 12 in. (30.5) 25 in. (55.9 cm) 77 lbs (35 kg) 50.6 lbs (23 kg) 3U 5.25 in. (13.3 cm) 17.6 in. (44.8 cm) 20 in. (50.9 cm)
150
Table 135. EXN2000 and EXN4000 environmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range 50 F to 104 F (10 C to 40 C) Operating temperature recommended range 68 F to 77 F (20 C to 25 C) Nonoperating temperature range -40 F to 149 F (-40 C to 65 C) Relative humidity Recommended operating temperature relative humidity range Maximum wet bulb temperature Maximum altitude Acoustic level
1, 4 2, 3
10 to 90% noncondensing 40 to 55% 28 C (82 F) 3050 m (10,000 ft.) 56.4 dBA @ 23 C 5.64 bels @ 23 C
1. Noise emission notes: a. LWAd is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines. b. LpAm is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator position (if any) for a production series of machines. c. <LpA>m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at the one-meter positions for a production series of machines. d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position). e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4. f. N/A - not available. 2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1 C per 137 m (450 ft) above 915 m (3000 ft). 3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1 C per 274 m (900 ft) above 305 m (1000 ft). 4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor. 5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance with ISO 9296. Table 136. EXN2000 electrical requirements (10K speed drives) 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU 3.31 3.56 4.0 330 356 399 1125 1215 1362 1.72 1.72 1.95 171 171 194 584 584 660 Typical System, two PSUs 3.43 3.43 3.89 342 342 387 1167 1167 1320 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU 1.61 1.75 1.96 318 348 420 1084 1185 1433 0.84 0.87 0.95 162 167 187 552 570 638 Typical System, two PSUs 1.67 1.73 1.9 323 334 374 1103 1140 1275
Size (GB) 72 GB 144 GB 288 GB
72 GB 144 GB 288 GB
Thermal 72 GB dissipation, BTU/hr 144 GB 288 GB
151
Table 137. EXN2000 electrical requirements (15K speed drives) 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU 3.41 3.96 4.43 4.43 340 395 443 443 1159 1347 1512 1512 1.82 1.88 2.16 2.16 181 187 216 216 617 636 735 735 Typical System, two PSUs 3.63 3.75 4.32 4.32 362 373 431 431 1234 1272 1470 1470 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU 1.67 1.93 2.23 2.23 331 383 443 443 1129 1245 1512 1512 0.89 0.94 1.07 1.07 173 183 208 208 589 653 707 707 Typical System, two PSUs 1.78 1.88 2.13 2.13 345 365 415 415 1178 1305 1414 1414
Size (GB) 72 GB 144 GB 288 GB 450 GB
72 GB 144 GB 288 GB 450 GB
Thermal 72 GB dissipation, BTU/hr 144 GB 288 GB 450 GB
Table 138. EXN4000 electrical requirements (10K speed drives) 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU 2.81 3.44 3.89 279 344 388 953 1174 1324 1.51 1.68 1.89 150 167 189 510 570 644 Typical System, two PSUs 3.01 3.36 3.78 299 334 377 1020 1140 1287 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU 1.38 1.68 1.90 272 333 376 926 1137 1283 0.76 0.83 0.94 145 161 182 495 548 621 Typical System, two PSUs 1.51 1.66 1.87 290 321 364 990 1095 1242
Size (GB) 72 GB 144 GB 288 GB
72 GB 144 GB 288 GB
Thermal 72 GB dissipation, BTU/hr 144 GB 288 GB
Table 139. EXN4000 electrical requirements (15K speed drives) 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU 3.42 3.54 4.52 4.52 1.83 1.73 2.14 2.14 Typical System, two PSUs 3.65 3.45 4.27 4.27 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU 1.66 1.73 2.23 2.23 0.91 0.87 1.06 1.06 Typical System, two PSUs 1.82 1.73 2.12 2.12
Size (GB) 72 GB 144 GB 288 GB 450 GB
152
Table 139. EXN4000 electrical requirements (15K speed drives) (continued) 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU 342 354 451 451 1167 1208 1538 1538 182 172 213 213 619 587 726 726 Typical System, two PSUs 363 344 426 426 1238 1174 1452 1452 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU 329 343 443 443 1222 1170 1512 1512 177 167 207 207 602 570 705 705 Typical System, two PSUs 353 334 414 414 1204 1140 1410 1410
Input voltage Input power measured, W
Size (GB) 72 GB 144 GB 288 GB 450 GB
Table 140. EXN4000 electrical requirements (HE PSUs, 15K speed drives) 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU 2.82 3.39 3.59 3.44 281 358 358 342 959 1221 1221 1166 1.33 1.65 1.65 1.62 133 164 164 161 452 560 560 547 Typical System, two PSUs 2.66 3.29 3.29 3.24 265 328 328 321 904 1119 1119 1094 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU 1.36 1.75 1.75 1.70 270 349 349 332 921 1191 1191 1132 0.65 0.81 0.81 0.84 130 161 161 158 442 548 548 539 Typical System, two PSUs 1.30 1.61 1.61 1.68 259 321 321 316 883 1095 1095 1077
Size (GB) 144 GB 288 GB 450 GB 600 GB
144 GB 288 GB 450 GB 600 GB
Note: Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed. Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.
EXN3000 hardware specifications

The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your EXN3000 storage expansion unit.
153
DANGER Three people are required to lift the EXN3000 during installation.
Note: For detailed EXN3000 electrical requirements with SAS and SATA drives, see Table 145 on page 155 and Table 146 on page 155. Note: Operating at the extremes of the environmental requirements might increase the risk of device failure.
Table 141. EXN3000 physical characteristics Weight With maximum number of disk drives Without disk drives Empty Rack units Height Width Depth Table 142. EXN3000 clearance dimensions Front (cooling) Rear (cooling and maintenance) Front (maintenance) Table 143. EXN3000 environmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range 10 C to 40 C (50 F to 104 F) Operating temperature recommended range 20 C to 25 C (68 F to 77 F) Nonoperating temperature range -40 C to 65 C (-40 F to 149 F) Recommended operating range (relative humidity) Maximum operating range (relative humidity) Non-operating range (relative humidity) Maximum wet bulb temperature Maximum altitude Acoustic level 40 to 55% 20 to 80% (non-condensing) 10 to 95% (non-condensing). 28 C (82 F) 3050 m (10,000 ft.) v Idle 5.7 bels (SATA drives) 6.0 bels (SAS drives) v Operating 6.7 bels (SATA drives) 7.0 bels (SAS drives) 6 in. (15.3 cm) 12 in. (30.5 cm) 25 in. (55.95 cm) 98.3 lbs (44.6 kg) 52.8 lbs (24 kg) 21.5 lbs (9.8 kg) 4U 6.9 in. (17.5 cm) 17.7 in. (44.9 cm) 25.7 in. (65.4 cm)
154
Table 144. EXN3000 electrical requirements Wet bulb (caloric value) v 2,201 Btu/hr (fully loaded shelf, SAS drives) v 1,542 Btu/hr (fully loaded shelf, SATA drives) Maximum electrical power Nominal Electrical Power 100 to 240 VAC 16-6 A (8-3A max per inlet); 50/60Hz v 100 to 120 VAC, 6 A; 200 to 240 VAC, 3 A, 50/60 Hz (SAS drives) v 100 to 120 VAC, 4.4 A; 200 to 240 VAC, 2.1 A, 50/60 Hz (SATA drives) Table 145. EXN3000 electrical requirementsSAS drives 100 to 120V Worstcase, two PSUs 5.5 6.0 5.98 550 600 595 1877 2047 2028 Typical Per PSU pair 3.0 3.15 2.86 300 315 284 1024 1075 917 200 to 240V (200V actual) WorstSystem, case, four two PSUs PSUs 6.0 6.3 5.71 600 630 567 2048 2150 1833 2.8 3.0 2.99 560 600 584 1911 2047 1991 Typical Per PSU pair 1.5 1.6 1.44 300 320 274 1024 1092 933 200 to 240V (215V actual) Typical Per PSU pair 1.4 1.5 System, four PSUs 2.8 3.0
Size (GB) 300 450 600
WorstSystem, case, four two PSUs PSUs 3.0 3.2 2.87 600 640 547 2048 2184 1865 2.6 2.8 n/a 559 602 n/a 1908 2054 n/a
Input power 300 measured, W 450 600 Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 300 450 600
301 323
602 645
1027 1101
2055 2201
Notes: 1. Worst-case indicates a system running with two PSUs, high fan speed, and power distributed over two power cords. 2. Per PSU pair indicates typical power needs, per PSU pair, for a system operating under normal conditions. 3. System indicates typical power needs for four PSUs in a system operating under normal conditions and power distributed over four power cords. Note: Depending on the disk drive type, your EXN3000 might have two or four power supplies. EXN3000s with SAS disk drives have four power supplies and require the use of four power outlets.
Table 146. EXN3000 electrical requirementsSATA drives 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 4.3 4.41 4.72 Typical Per PSU 2.2 2.21 2.31 200 to 240V (200V actual) WorstSystem, case, two single PSUs PSU 4.4 4.42 4.62 2.1 2.21 2.42 Typical Per PSU 1.1 1.14 1.21 200 to 240V (215V actual) Typical Per PSU 1.05 1.05 System, two PSUs 2.1 2.1
Size (GB) 500 1 TB 2 TB
WorstSystem, case, two single PSUs PSU 2.2 2.27 2.42 1.9 1.9 n/a
155
Table 146. EXN3000 electrical requirementsSATA drives (continued) 100 to 120V Worstcase, single PSU 430 439 469 1467 1496 1599 Typical Per PSU 220 219 229 751 747 781 200 to 240V (200V actual) WorstSystem, case, two single PSUs PSU 440 438 458 1501 1493 1561 420 429 470 1433 1462 1602 Typical Per PSU 220 212 228 751 724 777 200 to 240V (215V actual) Typical Per PSU 226 226 System, two PSUs 452 452
Input voltage
Size (GB)
WorstSystem, case, two single PSUs PSU 440 424 456 1501 1447 1554 409 409 n/a 1395 1395 n/a
Input power 500 measured, W 1 TB 2 TB Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 500 1 TB 2 TB
771 771
1542 1542
Notes: 1. Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU, high fan speed, and power distributed over one power cord. 2. Per PSU indicates typical power needs, per PSU, for a system operating under normal conditions. 3. System indicates typical power needs for two PSUs in a system operating under normal conditions and power distributed over two power cords. Note: Depending on the disk drive type, your EXN3000 might have two or four power supplies. EXN3000s with SATA disk drives have two power supplies and require the use of two power outlets.
Important factors to consider

When installing the N series storage system, you must keep in mind certain environmental factors. When you are planning your installation give careful consideration to the following: v Weight of the N series storage system. See Hardware specifications on page 118. The N series storage system requires three people to install it. v Rack considerations. The clearances and mounting requirements are specified in Rack considerations on page 157. v Power supplies and power requirements. You may need to provide new service or install an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). See Power supplies and power requirements on page 157 for more information. v System input power. See System input power on page 159 for more information. v Thermal considerations. See Thermal considerations on page 159. v Floor loading. See Floor-loading specifications on page 160. v Floor planning. See Floor plan considerations on page 160 for more information. v Cabling. Both Ethernet and Fibre Channel cabling will be required. See Chapter 4, Site planning, on page 111 and Chapter 5, Cable planning, on page 163. v AutoSupport. AutoSupport is a sophisticated, event-driven logging agent featured in the Data ONTAP operating software and inside each N series storage systems that continuously monitors the health of your system. See Chapter 6, AutoSupport, on page 167.
156
Rack considerations
The four recommended racks for the N series storage system are: v IBM 7014 Model T00 (a 36U high rack) v IBM 7014 Model T42 (a 42U high rack) v IBM 2101 Model N00 (a 36U high rack) v IBM 2101 Model N42 (a 42U high rack) The N series storage system can also be mounted in some other IBM and non-IBM racks, provided the rack meets all the requirements specified in Appendix C, Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks, on page 175. When clustering N series storage systems, the physical proximity of the cluster nodes is determined by the Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables that are ordered. Feature codes are available for cluster cables ranging in size from 2 m to 30 m. For more information, see Chapter 2, IBM N series hardware features, on page 9.
Power supplies and power requirements

N series storage systems contain two hot-swappable power supplies. They are both active at the same time, but have sufficient capacity that if one fails the other can assume the full load. Each power supply has a separate power cord. Separate power sources for each power cord are recommended. Power cords with attached plugs are provided for most ac-powered systems. The power cords are ordered by feature code and at least one power cord must be specified when the ordering the N series storage system. A feature code contains two cords, one for each power supply. Power cables vary by country and are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 171. Specific voltage information for NAS storage systems and storage expansion units is provided in the following tables: v N3300 storage systems: Table 72 on page 121 Table 73 on page 122 Table 74 on page 123 Table 75 on v N3400 storage Table 76 on Table 77 on Table 78 on Table 79 on v N3600 storage page 124 systems: page 124 page 126 page 127 page 127 systems:
Table 80 on page 128 Table 81 on page 129 Table 82 on Table 83 on v N3700 storage Table 87 on page 130 page 131 systems: page 132
157
v N5000 series storage systems: Table 91 on page 135 Table 92 on page 135 Table 93 on page 135 Table 94 on page 136 Table 95 on page 136 Table 96 on page 136 v N6000 series storage systems: Table 101 on page 138 Table 102 on page 138 Table 103 on page 139 Table 104 on page 139 Table 105 on page 140 Table 106 on page 140 Table 107 on page 140 Table 108 on page 141 Table 109 on page 141 Table 110 on page 141
Table 111 on page 142 Table 112 on page 142 v N7000 series storage systems: Table 124 Table 125 Table 126 Table 127 on on on on page page page page 147 147 148 148
v EXN1000 storage expansion units: Table 131 on page 149 Table 132 on page 150 v EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units: Table 136 Table 138 Table 139 Table 140 on on on on page page page page 151 152 152 153
v EXN3000 storage expansion units: Table 145 on page 155 Table 146 on page 155 Important: 1. Before you install the N series storage system, you must make sure that its proposed location meets the power requirements. If necessary, consult an electrician to determine if your electrical infrastructure can support the N series storage system that you are installing. 2. Consider security when planning your power requirements. (For example, your power mains should be in a secure area.) See Security on page 161 for more information.
158
System input power

The following input power considerations apply to all system units. See Rack considerations on page 157 for additional information about power.
Electrical considerations
These topics should be considered before you install a system.
Primary computer power service

Although a dedicated power supply is not necessary, for maximum reliability, the computer power panel should connect to feeders that do not serve other loads. Connect electrical noise-producing devices to panels separate from those feeding the system units.
Grounding
For information about grounding your N series storage systems and storage expansion units, refer to the Installation and Setup Instructions for your N series products. To ensure proper grounding, a licensed electrician should check the grounding and receptacles for conformance with the country electrical codes.
Computer room emergency power-off controls

As a safety precaution, you should provide computer room emergency power-off controls for disconnecting the main service wiring that supplies the computer equipment. Install these controls at a convenient place for the operator and next to the main exit doors of the room.
Lightning protection
You should install lightning protection devices when in environments such as these: v An overhead power service supplies the primary power. v The area is subject to electrical storms or equivalent-type power surges.
Three-phase power
If your rack power distribution uses three-phase power, consult a licensed electrician to ensure that the loads are properly balanced.
Thermal considerations
When installed in a rack, all components, including the N series storage system, should have front-to-back air flow. Failure to do so results in a thermal loop, where the heated exhaust air from one unit is drawn into the air intake of another, which further heats the air. Eventually a unit will shut down or fail to operate due to high temperature.
159
Airflow back
Racks
front 1220 mm cold aisle width Perforated tiles or gratings
Cold aisle
Airflow front 2440 mm between center lines of hot and cold aisle back
Air conditioner
Racks
Hot aisle
back
Racks
front Airflow
Figure 13. Example of cold aisle/hot aisle rack cabinet configuration
Nsipg001
Floor-loading specifications
Consult with an engineer to determine your floor-loading specifications. See Hardware specifications on page 118 for information on the N series storage system weight. See Appendix C, Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks, on page 175 for rack floor-loading specifications.
Floor plan considerations

You need to create a floor plan before installing a N series storage system. This section describes floor planning considerations and how to create a floor plan. It also describes what security measures to keep in mind when doing floor planning. Before you create your floor plan, consider these variables: v Flow of work and personnel within the area v Placement to optimize cooling, such as positioning the unit over a cutout in a raised floor v Routing of cables and length of cables v Location of safety equipment v Future expansion
Creating a floor plan

It is important to ensure that the total weight of installed racks and equipment does not exceed the maximum amount of weight that the floor in your facility supports.
160
You need to create a floor plan before installing a N series storage system. This section discusses floor planning considerations and how to create a floor plan. It also discusses security measures to keep in mind when doing your floor planning. Note: You might need to prepare and analyze several plans before choosing a final one. If you install more than one N series storage system in more than one installation stage, prepare a separate plan for each installation stage. Begin with an accurate drawing of the installation area (blueprints and floor plans are appropriate). Include the following items in your floor plan: v Service and operational clearances. v If the N series storage system will be on a raised floor, consider any objects that might obstruct cable routing and the height of the raised floor. v If the N series storage system will not be on a raised floor, consider these factors: Placement of cables to minimize obstruction Amount of additional cable required if the cable is indirectly routed between N series storage system (for example, along the walls or suspended from the ceiling) v Location of: Power receptacles Air conditioning equipment and controls File cabinets, desks, and other office equipment Room emergency power-off controls All entrances, walkways, exits, windows, columns, and pillars v LAN and telephone connections. When you finish the floor plan, review it to make sure that all cables to be connected to the N series storage system are long enough. Also ensure that the N series storage system has enough clearance.
Security
In forming your floor plan, you should consider ways to keep your N series storage system secure. For security purposes, use these precautions: v Choose a trusted administrator. v Place any equipment that may disrupt operations (for example, power supplies) in a secure location. v Keep rack cabinet keys in a secure location.
161
162
Chapter 5. Cable planning

Before ordering, the customer is asked to develop specific planning information concerning the physical layout of the installation. This chapter can help you plan your layout by presenting useful planning information for interconnecting the system units and devices. You must plan the type of cable, cable path, and cable length. Consider not only your current needs but also your anticipated growth and the relocation of personnel. To assist with the installation of your system, you should note cable paths on your floor plan. The customer is responsible for planning for the installation of interconnecting cables, including the proper lightning and surge protection as necessary and should contact the appropriate contractor for guidance and assistance as required.
General considerations
In preparing for cabling, consider the following: v Where applicable, electrical and physical specifications of cables that you currently have and plan to use with the N series storage system must be compatible with the standards mentioned in this manual. If no standard is specifically mentioned in this manual, the standards for the interface on that adapter must be met. v Lengths and paths of cables. v Communication signal cables should be installed away from power lines or other sources of electrical interference. v Labeling of cables and ports you currently have in order to indicate which devices you want attached to them. v Electrostatic discharge (ESD) considerations. In particular, unprotected patch panels, punch blocks, or other intermediate routing or switching devices used in cabling can allow ESD into the network. Note: Lightning protection must be provided on any cable that travels outside of the building in which the system or devices are installed. Contact a cabling vendor about providing lightning protection for those cables. Fiber-optic cables do not require lightning protection. The following cabling is required: 1. Power cables for power supplies and rack power distribution. 2. Category 5 or better copper Ethernet cables with RJ-45 connectors. Note: EXN3000 ACP cabling requires Category 6 or better Ethernet cables with RJ-45 connectors. 3. 50 or 62.5 um fiber optic cable with LC connectors for Fiber Ethernet ports. 4. 50 or 62.5 um fiber optic cable with LC connectors for Fibre Channel ports. 5. LVD SCSI cable for optional direct SCSI-attached tape backup. The connector on the rear of the N series storage system is a VHDCI mini 68pin connector. 6. If clustering, Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables are available for N5000 series and N7000 series models and can be ordered in the following lengths and types:
163
Table 147. Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables Description 2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable Machine 2864, 2865 , 2866, 2867, 2868, 2869 2864, 2865, 2866, 2867, 2868, 2869 Model A20/G20/A21 A20/G20/A21 A20/G20/A21 A20/G20/A21 1037 1040 1041 1042 Feature
30m Fiber Cluster 4X 2864, 2865, 2866, IB cable 2867, 2868, 2869 Copper-Fiber Converter 2864, 2865, 2866, 2867, 2868, 2869
Cable measuring
Accurate measuring of cables is critical to a successful and efficient installation. Do not guess or estimate your cable lengths. Some cable lengths are fixed. For example, the Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables are fixed length cables that restrict the physical distance of the cluster nodes in the rack. The power cords, depending on the feature code, are also of fixed lengths. For the Ethernet and Fibre Channel cabling, consider the following: 1. Cabling that exits the N series storage system is typically run in a cable management tray, included with the N series storage system. 2. Avoid sharp bends and do not route cables near rack doors to avoid crimping cables. 3. Account for raised floor height, if appropriate.
Cable labeling
Cable labels can be used to organize your cabling. The fields on a cable label are: Room Person Telephone # Device type Device ID Software location code The room number, or other information about the physical location of the device. The name of the person who uses the device. The nearest telephone number to the device. This could be a printer, plotter, TTY, or similar device. The device ID is determined when the software is configured on the system. The software location code is the link between the hardware and software. This code appears in the software configuration menus and in the hardware diagnostic menus. Note: For specific location code information, refer to the Diagnostic Information manual for your system. Adapter type The adapter type number is located on a label attached to the end of the adapter.
164
Note: Some of the adapters do not have an adapter type. Interface Name of the asynchronous adapters, and some network adapters, generally includes the name of the interface. For example, Ethernet LAN or Fibre Channel SAN. Used in a rack-type system unit to identify the physical location of the drawer within the rack. The label along the right side of the rack (with rear cover open) indicates numbers from 1, at the bottom, to 32, at the top of the rack. The number at the bottom-right corner of the drawer is the EIA location for this drawer. Physical position within the system unit or drawer where the adapter is located. Each adapter slot is identified by a single digit number. Usually, the number is embossed in the adapter mounting frame. Connector number on the adapter. Most adapters have only one connector, so this number is 1. The number of the tailgate connector to which this cable is attached if tailgates are used. If an installation has more than one system unit, each one must be identified to prevent connecting devices to the wrong system unit. The customer determines the System ID.
EIA
Slot
Connector Tailgate System ID
Chapter 5. Cable planning
165
166
Chapter 6. AutoSupport
AutoSupport is a sophisticated, event-driven logging agent featured in the Data ONTAP operating software and inside each N series storage systems that continuously monitors the health of your system. It keeps a watchful eye on a multitude of preset conditions, automatically sending a status message to IBM Technical Support, and your system administrator if desired, for immediate action to correct potential problems. AutoSupport makes sure that your storage environment is working at top efficiency.
How does AutoSupport work?

The AutoSupport feature triggers the automatic sending of notification messages to IBM Service and Support. AutoSupport also has the ability to send notification messages to one or more customer-specified e-mail addresses which can alert recipients to potential problems with the N series storage system. As necessary, IBM Service and Support will contact customers based on the contact information in the customers record for resolution of potential system problems. Note: After an occurrence of an event, an AutoSupport notification is sent to IBM Service and Support via HTTPS by a direct connection to the predefined location specified in Data ONTAP. AutoSupport is enabled by default with Data ONTAP 7.1.1 or later when you configure your N series storage system for the first time. IBM strongly encourages customers to enable AutoSupport. AutoSupport enables the IBM System Storage N series machines to send diagnostic information back to IBM when error conditions are encountered within the machines. AutoSupport can be enabled via the command line interface via the following command: options autosupport.enable on AutoSupport can also be enabled via the FilerView web browser user interface by selecting Filer Configure AutoSupport in the left-hand navigation frame, and then selecting Yes from the drop-down list box next to AutoSupport Enabled. On later versions of Data ONTAP, AutoSupport is enabled by default when you configure your N series storage system for the first time. After a grace period of 24 hours, AutoSupport messages start being generated. Note: You can disable AutoSupport at any time using the autosupport.enable option, but you are strongly advised to leave it enabled.
Interaction with mail hosts

N series storage systems do not function as mail hosts, they rely on another host at the customer site that listens on the SMTP port (25) to send mail to the customer-specified e-mail addresses. AutoSupport requires at least one host reachable by an N series storage system that runs an SMTP server or a mail forwarder, such as the sendmail program.
Subject line of AutoSupport e-mail messages

The subject line of the e-mail messages sent by the AutoSupport mechanism contains a text string that identifies the reason for the notification. The subject also
167
contains a relative prioritization of the message, using syslog severity levels from DEBUG to EMERGENCY. The messages and other information in the notification should be used to check on the problem being reported. The format of the subject line is as follows: System Notification from (message)
Short e-mail messages for urgent events

Customers can specify up to five addresses of e-mail recipients in which the N series storage systems can send a short alert notification containing only the reason for the alert to these recipients. The short e-mail messages contain the reason for the notification in the subject line and note the time of failure. These messages are triggered only by specific urgent events. This feature is useful for system administrators who read e-mail messages on alphanumeric pagers.
Recipients of AutoSupport e-mail messages

Customers can specify up to five e-mail recipient addresses for standard AutoSupport notification.
Technical Support response

When IBM Technical Support receives an alert AutoSupport notification, it takes corrective action to resolve the problems. IBM Technical Support initiates a case and then contacts the customer to further investigate the situation or to provide a corrective action to the customer.
Cluster considerations
The AutoSupport notification messages from a N series storage system in a cluster are different from the AutoSupport notification messages from a standalone N series storage system in the following ways: v The subject line in the AutoSupport messages from a filer in a cluster reads Cluster notification instead of System notification. v The AutoSupport messages from a N series storage system in a cluster contain information about the N series storage system's partner, such as the partner system ID and the partner host name. v In takeover mode, if you reboot the live N series storage system, two AutoSupport messages are sent to notify the e-mail recipients of the reboot. The live N series storage system sends one message; the failed N series storage system sends the other message. v The live N series storage system sends an AutoSupport message after it completes the takeover process.
168
Appendix A. Recommended power line sizes

This appendix discusses how to determine the power line lengths running from your N series storage system to the power source.
Recommended AC power line sizes

Longer AC power feeds need to be properly designed to preserve voltage levels to the equipment. The wiring from the breaker panel to the power strip, which supplies power to your N series storage system and storage expansion units, can often exceed 50 feet. Note: Total AC wire length = breaker to wall or ceiling outlet + extension cable or ceiling drop. The following tables list the recommended conductor size for 2% voltage drop for a particular distance in feet (taken from the Radio Engineer's Handbook).
Table 148. 110V, single phase recommended conductor sizes 110V, single-phase 25 feet 50 feet 75 feet 20A circuit 12 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 30A circuit 10 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 40A circuit 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 50A circuit 8 AWG 4 AWG 2 AWG
Table 149. 220V, single phase recommended conductor sizes 220V, single-phase 25 feet 50 feet 75 feet 20A circuit 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 30A circuit 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 40A circuit 12 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 50A circuit 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG
The following table lists the approximate equivalent wire gauge (American Wire Gauge (AWG) to Harmonized Cordage).
Table 150. American Wire Gage to Harmonized Cordage equivalents AWG Harmonized, mm-mm
1
8 4.0
10 2.5
12 1.5
mm-mm = millimeter squared
169
170
Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems

This appendix contains information about FRU/CRUs and power cords for N series products.
FRU/CRU list for N series products

For the most current FRU/CRU list for your N series product, see the following web site: www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/
Power cord list for N series products

The following list details the power cord feature codes (FCs) for N series products. FC 9000 (All countries) Power cord, Rack PDU v 27 inches v Rated 250 V/15 A v Product end uses C14; PDU end uses C13. FC 9001 Europe and others Provides power cords for Austria, Belgium, Bolivia, Bulgaria, Chile, Croatia, Czech Republic, Egypt, Estonia, European Union, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Indonesia, Latvia, Lebanon, Lithuania, Luxemburg, Morocco, Netherlands, Norway, Peru, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Russia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Suriname, Sweden, Turkey v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. v Attached plug EL 211 (CEE 7-VII) designed for 200-240 V ac input. FC 9002 United Kingdom and others Provides power cords for United Kingdom, Costa Rica, Cyprus, Guyana, Hong Kong, Ireland, Kuwait, Malta, Oman, Singapore, Sri Lanka v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. v Attached plug EL 210 (13A fuse) designed for 200-240 V ac input. FC 9003 Japan Provides power cords for Japan v 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 125 V/15 A. v Attached plug EL 302 (JIS C3306) designed for 100-110 V ac input. FC 9004 U.S., Six Feet (2 m) Provides power cords for U.S., Canada, Mexico, Belize, Columbia, Ecuador, El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, Korea, Nicaragua, Panama, Philippines, Puerto Rico, Saudi Arabia, Thailand, Venezuela v 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 125 V/15 A. v Attached plug EL 302 (Nema 5-15P) designed for 100-120 V ac input. FC 9005 Australia, New Zealand Provides power cords for Australia, New Zealand, Uruguay v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. v Attached plug EL 206 (AS 3112) designed for 200-240 V ac input.
171
FC 9006 Switzerland, Liechtenstein Provides power cords for Switzerland, Liechtenstein v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. v Attached plug EL 203 (SEV 1011) designed for 200-240 V ac input. FC 9007 Argentina Provides power cords for Argentina v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. v Attached plug EL 219 (IRAM 2073) designed for 200-240 V ac input. FC 9008 China Provides power cords for China v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. v Attached plug EL 602 (GB 2099/GB 1002) designed for 200-240 V ac input. FC 9009 Denmark Provides power cords for Denmark v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. v Attached plug EL 213 (DHCR 107-2-D1) designed for 200-240 V ac input. FC 9010 India, Pakistan, South Africa Provides power cords for India, Macau, Pakistan, South Africa v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. v Attached plug EL 208 (BS 164-1, BS 546) designed for 200-240 V ac input. FC 9011 Israel Provides power cords for Israel v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. v Attached plug EL 212 (SI 32) designed for 200-240 V ac input. FC 9012 Italy Provides power cords for Italy v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. v Attached plug EL 502 (CEI 23-16) designed for 200-240 V ac input. FC 9013 North America (250 V) Provides power cords for U.S. v 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/15 A. v Attached plug EL 309 (NEMA 6-15P) designed for 200-240 V ac input. FC 9014 Brazil Provides power cords for Brazil v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. v Attached plug EL 211 (NBR 6147/2000) designed for 200-240 V ac input FC 9015 Taiwan Provides 125 V power cords for Taiwan v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 125 V/15 A. v Attached plug EL 302 (CNS 10917-3) designed for 100-120 V ac input. FC 9016 Taiwan (250 V) Provides 250 V power cords for Taiwan v 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.
172
v Attached plug EL 610 (CNS 10917, CNS 690) designed for 250 V ac input.
Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems
173
174
Appendix C. Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks

This chapter provides requirements and specifications for 19" racks used by the N series storage system.
2101 Model N00 rack specifications

Table 151. IBM 2101 Model N00 rack specifications
Dimensions Height Capacity Width without side panels With side panels Depth with front and rear door installed Weight Base rack Full rack Electrical AC rack Power source loading maximum in kVA (per PDU)3 Voltage range (V ac) Frequency (hertz) Temperature requirements Humidity requirements Noise emissions Clearances Install/air flow Front 1804 mm 71.0 in. 36 EIA Units 623 mm 24.5 in. 650 mm 25.6 in. 1100 mm 43.3 in.
244 kg 535 lbs 816 kg 1795 lbs See T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading on page 180. (sum specified values for drawers or enclosures in rack) 4.8
200 to 240 50 or 60 (see specifications for drawers or enclosures)
(see specifications for drawers or enclosures) (see specifications for drawers or enclosures) Back Left Right
Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed (see item 5 on page 177). Refer to the individual drawer specifications. 915 mm (36 in.) 915 mm (36 in.) 0 mm (0 in.) 0 mm (0 in.)
Service
1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight plus the weight of the drawers mounted in the rack. The rack can support up to a maximum weight of 35 lbs/EIA (Unit). 2. The total rack power should be derived from the sum of the power used by the drawers in the rack. 3. Each ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU) can supply 4.8 kVA. A rack can have up to four PDUs as required by the drawers mounted in the rack. The power limitations of the PDU single-phase power cord limit the number of drawers that can be plugged into a pair of PDUs. Each PDU single-phase power cord is limited to 24 amps. 4. All rack installations require careful site and facilities planning designed to both address the cumulative drawer heat output and provide the airflow volumes rates necessary to comply with drawer temperature requirements.
175
2101 Model N42 rack specifications

Table 152. IBM 2101 Model N42 rack specifications
Dimensions Height Capacity Width without side panels With side panels Depth with front and rear door installed Weight Base rack Full rack Electrical AC rack Power source loading maximum in kVA (per PDU)3 Voltage range (V ac) Frequency (hertz) Temperature requirements Humidity requirements Noise emissions Clearances Install/air flow Front 2105 mm 79.3 in. 42 EIA Units 623 mm 24.5 in. 650 mm 25.6 in. 1100 mm 43.3 in.
216 kg 475 lbs (without PDUs and with standard doors and two side panels) 930 kg 2045 lbs See T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading on page 180. (sum specified values for drawers or enclosures in rack) 4.8
Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed (see item 5 on page 177). Refer to the individual drawer specifications. 915 mm (36 in.) 915 mm (36 in.) 0 mm (0 in.) 0 mm (0 in.)
Service
1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight plus the weight of the drawers mounted in the rack. The rack can support up to a maximum weight of 35 lbs/EIA (Unit). 2. The total rack power should be derived from the sum of the power used by the drawers in the rack. 3. Each ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU) can supply 4.8 kVA. A rack can have up to four PDUs as required by the drawers mounted in the rack. The power limitations of the PDU single-phase power cord limit the number of drawers that can be plugged into a pair of PDUs. Each PDU single-phase power cord is limited to 24 amps. 4. All rack installations require careful site and facilities planning designed to both address the cumulative drawer heat output and provide the airflow volumes rates necessary to comply with drawer temperature requirements. 5. For information about the Rear Door Heat eXchanger (FC 6858), see the IBM Rear Door Heat eXchanger Planning Guide on www.ibm.com/pc/support, or see the IBM Power Systems Site Preparation and Physical Planning Guide, SA76-0103, or the IBM Storage Solution Rack 2101 Rack Installation and Service Guide: Model N42, GC53-1174.
176
7014 Rack specifications Model T00 rack

Table 153. IBM 7014 Model T00 rack specifications
Dimensions Height Capacity With PDP - DC only Width without side panels With side panels Depth with rear door only Depth with rear door and RS/6000 style front door System p (sculptured) style front door Weight Base rack Full rack Electrical DC rack Power source loading maximum in kVA Voltage range (V dc) AC rack Power source loading maximum in kVA (per PDU) Voltage range (V ac) Frequency (hertz) Temperature requirements Humidity requirements Noise emissions Clearances Install/air flow Front 1804 mm 71.0 in. 36 EIA Units 1926 mm 75.8 in. 623 mm 24.5 in. 644 mm 25.4 in. 1042 mm 41.0 in. 1098 mm 43.3 in.
1147 mm 45.2 in.
244 kg 535 lbs 816 kg 1795 lbs See T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading on page 180. (sum specified values for drawers or enclosures in rack) 8.4 -40 to -60 4.8
Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed (see item 5). Refer to the individual drawer specifications. 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.)
Service
1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight plus the weight of the drawers mounted in the rack. The rack can support up to a maximum weight of 35 lbs/EIA (Unit). 2. The total rack power should be derived from the sum of the power used by the drawers in the rack. 3. The Power Distribution Panel (PDP) on the DC-powered rack can hold up to eighteen (nine per power source) 48 volt 20 to 50 amp circuit breakers (configuration dependent). Each power source supports up to 8.4 kVA. Note: Because the N series storage system is an ac-only power unit, it is not recommended that the N series storage system be installed in a dc-only rack. 4. Each ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU) can supply 4.8 kVA. A rack can have up to four PDUs as required by the drawers mounted in the rack. 5. All rack installations require careful site and facilities planning designed to both address the cumulative drawer heat output and provide the airflow volumes rates necessary to comply with drawer temperature requirements.
Appendix C. Rack Specifications
177
Model T42 Rack

Table 154. IBM 7014 Model T42 rack specifications
Dimensions Height Capacity With PDP - DC only Width without side panels With side panels Depth with rear door only Depth with rear door and RS/6000 style front door System p (sculptured) style front door Weight Base rack Full rack 2015 mm 79.3 in. 42 EIA Units Not applicable 623 mm 24.5 in. 644 mm 25.4 in. 1042 mm 41.0 in. 1098 mm 43.3 in. 1147 mm 45.2 in.
261 kg 575 lbs 930 kg 2045 lbs See T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading on page 180. Recommended minimum vertical service clearance from floor is 2439 mm or 8 feet. For all other technical information, see Model T00 rack on page 177.
Service clearance All other specifications
T00 and T42 service clearances and caster location

The service clearances and caster locations are shown in Figure 14 on page 179:
178
915 mm (36 in.)
121 (4.8) 80 (3.1) Caster Location
Rear cover thickness 20 mm (0.8 in.)
915 mm (36 in.) Side cover thickness 2x 10 mm (0.4 in.)
915 mm (36 in.) Front cover thickness 58 mm (2.4 in.)

Cable opening 310 mm (12.2 in.) x 50 mm (2 in.)
2921 mm (115 in.)
915 mm (36 in.)

Front
2474 mm (97.4 in.)

Figure 14. Service clearances and caster locations for the T00 and T42 racks.
Note: Rack units are large and heavy and are not easily moved. Because maintenance activities require access at both the front and back, extra room needs to be allowed. The footprint shows the radius of the swinging doors on the I/O rack. The Figure 15 shows the minimum space required.
T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments
T00 or T42 Rack
T00 or T42 Rack
Separation 25.4 mm (1 in.)
Figure 15. Model T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments
179
T00 racks and T42 racks can be bolted together in a multiple rack arrangement as shown above. A kit is available including the bolts, spacers, and decorative trim pieces to cover the 25.4 mm (1 in.) space. For service clearances, see the service clearances as shown in the table for the Model T00 rack on page 177.
T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading

The T00 and T42 racks can be extremely heavy when several drawers are present. Table 155 shows the necessary weight distribution distances for the T00 and T42 racks when it is loaded.
Table 155. T00 and T42 rack weight distribution
Rack System weight (1) lbs (kg) 1795 (816) 1795 (816) 1795 (816) 2045 (930) 2045 (930) 2045 (930) Width (2) in. (mm) Depth (2) in. (mm) Weight distribution distance (3) Front & back in. (mm) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) Left & right in. (mm) 18.4 (467.4) 0.0 (0.0) 22 (559) 18.4 (467.4) 0.0 (0.0) 27 (686)
7014-T00 (4) 7014-T00 (5) 7014-T00 (6) 7014-T42 (4) 7014-T42 (5) 7014-T42 (6)
24.5 (623) 24.5 (623) 24.5 (623) 24.5 (623) 24.5 (623) 24.5 (623)
40.2 (1021) 40.2 (1021) 40.2 (1021) 40.2 (1021) 40.2 (1021) 40.2 (1021)
The following table shows the necessary floor-loading specifications for the T00 and T42 racks when it is loaded.
Table 156. T00 and T42 rack floor-loading specifications
Rack Raised kg/m2 7014-T00 (4) 7014-T00 (5) 7014-T00 (6) 7014-T42 (4) 7014-T42 (5) 7014-T42 (6) 366.7 734.5 341 403 825 341.4 Floor loading Non-raised kg/m2 322.7 690.6 297 359 781 297.5 Raised lbs/ft2 75 150.4 70 82.5 169 70 Non-raised lbs/ft2 66 141.4 61 73.5 160 61
The following notes are for both of the preceding tables. Notes: 1. For maximum weight of fully populated rack, units are lbs with kg in parentheses. 2. For dimensions without covers, units are inches with mm in parentheses. 3. The weight distribution distance in all four directions is the area around the rack perimeter (minus covers) necessary to distribute the weight beyond the perimeter of the rack. Weight distribution areas cannot overlap with adjacent computer equipment weight distribution areas. Units are inches with mm in parentheses.
180
4. Weight distribution distance is 1/2 the service clearance values shown in the figure plus cover thickness. 5. No left and right weight distribution distance. 6. Left and right weight distribution distance required for a 70 lbs/ft2 raised floor loading objective.
Rack specifications
All racks used for N series storage system installation must conform to the specifications in this section. Both the IBM 7014 (Model T00 and Model T42) and the IBM 2101 Model N00 racks conform, but some other racks, including a few from IBM do not. v The rack or cabinet must meet the EIA Standard EIA-310-D for 19-inch racks. The front rack opening must be 451 mm wide + 0.75 mm (17.75 in. + 0.03 in.), and the rail-mounting holes must be 465 mm + 0.8 mm (18.3 in. + 0.03 in.) apart on center (horizontal width between vertical columns of holes on the two front-mounting flanges and on the two rear-mounting flanges). Rail-mounting holes must be 7.1 mm + 0.1 mm (0.28 in. + 0.004 in.) in diameter.
571mm (22.50 in.)
Rear, No Door
203mm (8.0 in.)
Drawer Rail Mounting Flanges
494mm (19.45 in.)
719mm (28.31 in.)
Front, No Door
51mm (2.01 in.)
451mm (17.76 in.) 494mm (19.45 in.)

Figure 16. Top view of non-IBM rack specifications dimensions
181
The vertical distance between mounting holes must consist of sets of 3 holes spaced (from bottom to top) 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), and 12.67 mm (0.5 in.) on center (making each 3-hole set of vertical hole spacing 44.45 mm (1.75 in.) apart on center).
Figure 17. Rack specifications dimensions, top front view
182
Hole Diameter = 7.1 +/- 0.1mm
465 +/- 0.8mm Rack Mounting Holes Center-to-Center 450 +/- 0.75mm Rack Front Opening
12.7mm 12.7mm 15.9mm 15.9mm 12.7mm 15.9mm 15.9mm 6.75mm min
EIA Hole Spacing
15.9mm 15.9mm 12.7mm 15.9mm 15.9mm 6.75mm min
Bottom Front of Rack

Figure 18. Rack specifications dimensions, bottom front view
v The rack or cabinet must be capable of supporting an average load of 15.9 kg (35 lbs) of product weight per EIA unit. For example, a 4-EIA drawer will have a maximum drawer weight of 63.6 kg (140 lbs). v Only ac power drawers are supported in the rack or cabinet. It is strongly recommended that you use a power distribution unit (PDU) that meets the same specifications as IBM PDUs to supply rack power. Each Power Distribution Bus installed in a rack requires a dedicated power line of 200 to 240 V ac and 30 A. Rack or cabinet power distribution devices must meet the drawer power requirements, as well as that of any additional products that will be connected to the same power distribution device. The rack or cabinet power receptacle (PDU, UPS or multi-outlet strip) must have a compatible plug type for your drawer or device. Note: Refer to the sales manual for 7014 or 2101 racks if you want to use PDUs that are designed for 7014 or 2101 racks. The customer is responsible for ensuring that the PDU is compatible with the rack or cabinet and assumes responsibility for any and all agency certifications required. v The rack or cabinet must be compatible with drawer mounting rails, including a secure and snug fit of the rail-mounting pins and screws into the rack or cabinet rail support hole. Note: If the rack or cabinet has square holes, a plug-in hole adapter may be required. The plug-in hole adapters are NOT part of the N series rail mounting kit included with every N series machine. The rails provided with the N series storage system have been designed and tested to safely support the weight of your drawer or device. The rails also provide rear tie-down brackets.
183
The front and rear mounting flanges in the rack or cabinet must be 719 mm (28.3 in.) apart and the internal width bounded by the mounting flanges at least 494 mm (19.45 in.), for the IBM rails to fit in your rack or cabinet (see figure, Top View of non-IBM Rack Specifications Dimensions on page Figure 16 on page 181). v The rack or cabinet must have stabilization feet or brackets installed both in the front and rear of the rack, or have another means of preventing the rack or cabinet from tipping while the drawer or device is installed or removed. Examples of some acceptable alternatives: The rack or cabinet may be securely bolted to the floor, ceiling or walls, or to adjacent racks or cabinets in a long and heavy row of racks or cabinets. Refer to the Rack Installation Guide for the 7014 or 2101 and the individual drawer installation guides for additional information. v There must be adequate front and rear service clearances (in and around the rack or cabinet). The rack or cabinet must have sufficient horizontal width clearance in the front and rear to allow the drawer to be fully slid into the front and, if applicable, the rear service access positions (typically this requires 914.4 mm (36 in.) clearance in both the front and rear). If present, front and rear doors must be able to open far enough to provide unrestrained access for service or be easily removable. If doors must be removed for service, it is the customer's responsibility to remove them prior to service. v The rack or cabinet must provide adequate clearance around the rack drawer. There must be adequate clearance around the drawer bezel so that it can be opened and closed, according to the product specifications (refer to the 7014 or 2101 Rack Installation Guides and the individual drawer installation guides). Front or rear doors must also maintain a minimum of 51 mm (2 in.) front, 203 mm (8 in.) rear, door-to-mounting flange clearance, and 494 mm (19.4 in.) front, 571 mm (22.5 in.) rear, side-to-side clearance for drawer bezels and cables (see Figure 16 on page 181). v The rack or cabinet must provide adequate front-to-back ventilation. For optimum ventilation, it is recommended the rack or cabinet not have a front door. If the rack or cabinet has doors, the doors must be fully perforated so that there is proper front-to-back airflow to maintain the required drawer ambient inlet temperature between 10 C and 40 C (50 F and 104 F), with an ideal 22 C (72 F), inside the rack. The perforations must yield 34% minimum open area per square inch.
General safety requirements for IBM products installed in a non-IBM rack

v Any product or component that plugs into either an IBM Power Distribution Unit (PDU) or main power (using a power cord), or uses any voltage over 42 V ac must be Safety Certified by a Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL) for the country in which it will be installed. Some of the items that require safety certification may include: the rack or cabinet (if it contains electrical components integral to the rack or cabinet), fan trays, PDU, uninterruptible power supplies (UPS), multi-outlet strips, or any other products installed in the rack or cabinet that connect to hazardous voltage. Examples of OSHA-approved NRTLs for the USA: UL ETL
184
CSA (with CSA NRTL or CSA US mark) Examples of approved NRTLs for Canada: UL (Ulc mark) ETL (ETLc mark) CSA The European Union requires a CE mark and a Manufacturer's Declaration of Conformity (DOC). Certified products should have the NRTL logos or marks somewhere on the product or product label. However, proof of certification must be made available to IBM upon request. Proof consists of such items as copies of the NRTL license or certificate, a CB Certificate, a Letter of Authorization to apply the NRTL mark, the first few pages of the NRTL certification report, Listing in an NRTL publication, or a copy of the UL Yellow Card. Proof should contain the manufacturer's name, product type and model, standard to which it was certified, the NRTL name or logo, the NRTL file number or license number, and a list of any Conditions of Acceptance or Deviations. A Manufacturer's Declaration is not proof of certification by an NRTL. v The rack or cabinet must meet all electrical and mechanical safety legal requirements for the country in which it is installed. The rack or cabinet must be free of exposed hazards (such as voltages over 60 V dc or 42 V ac, energy over 240 VA, sharp edges, mechanical pinch points, or hot surfaces). v There must be an accessible and unambiguous disconnect device for each product in the rack, including any PDU. A disconnect device may consist of either the plug on the power cord (if the power cord is no longer than 6 feet), the inlet receptacle (if the power cord is of a detachable type), or a power on/off switch, or an Emergency Power Off switch on the rack, provided all power is removed from the rack or product by the disconnect device. If the rack or cabinet has electrical components (such as fan trays or lights), the rack must have an accessible and unambiguous disconnect device. v The rack or cabinet, PDU and Multi-Outlet Strips, and products installed in the rack or cabinet must all be properly grounded to the customer facility ground. There must be no more than 0.1 Ohms between the ground pin of the PDU or rack plug and any touchable metal or conductive surface on the rack and on the products installed in the rack. Grounding method must comply with applicable country's electric code (such as NEC or CEC). Ground continuity can be verified by your IBM service personnel, after the installation is completed, and should be verified prior to the first service activity. v The voltage rating of the PDU and multi-outlet strips must be compatible with the products plugged into them. The current and power ratings for the PDU or multi-outlet strips must be at least 1.25 times the sum of the ratings of the products that will plug into it. The current rating of the PDU or multi-outlet strip must be less than 0.80 of the rating for the building supply circuit (as required by the NEC and CEC). Example: A PDU rating of 12A for a 15A wall breaker, and sum of product ratings does not exceed 9.6A. If a UPS is installed, it must meet all the above electrical safety requirements as described for a PDU (including certification by an NRTL). v The rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, multi-outlet strips and all products in the rack or cabinet must be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, and in accordance with all national, state or province, and local codes and laws.
185
The rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, multi-outlet strips and all products in the rack or cabinet must be used as intended by the manufacturer (per manufacturer's product documentation and marketing literature). v All documentation for use and installation of the rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, and all products in the rack or cabinet, including safety information, must be available on-site. v If there is more than one source of power in the rack or cabinet, there must be clearly visible safety labels for "Multiple Power Source" (in the languages required for the country in which the product is installed). v If the rack or cabinet or any products installed in the cabinet had safety or weight labels applied by the manufacturer, they must be intact and translated into the languages required for the country in which the product is installed. v If the rack or cabinet has doors, the rack becomes a fire enclosure by definition and must meet the applicable flammability ratings (V-0 or better). Totally metal enclosures at least 1 mm (0.04 in.) thick are considered to comply. Nonenclosure (decorative) materials must have a flammability rating of V-1 or better. If glass is used (such as in rack doors) it must be safety glass. If wood shelves are used in the rack or cabinet, they must be treated with a UL Listed flame-retardant coating. v The rack or cabinet configuration must comply with all IBM requirements for "safe to service" (contact your IBM Installation Planning Representative if in doubt). There must be no unique maintenance procedures or tools required for service. Elevated service installations, where the products to be serviced are installed between 1.5 m and 3.7 m (5 ft and 12 ft) above the floor, require the availability of an OSHA- and CSA-approved nonconductive step ladder. If a ladder is required for service, the customer must supply the OSHA- and CSA-approved nonconductive step ladder (unless other arrangements have been made with the local IBM Service Branch Office). Products installed over 2.9 m (12 ft) above the floor require a Special Bid to be completed before they can be serviced by IBM service personnel. For products not intended for rack-mounting to be serviced by IBM, the products and parts that will be replaced as part of that service must not weigh over 11.4 kg (25 lbs) (contact your Installation Planning Representative if in doubt). There must not be any special education or training required for safe servicing of any of the products installed in the racks (contact your Installation Planning Representative if in doubt). v Any rack or cabinet must have stabilization feet or brackets installed, or have another means of preventing the rack or cabinet from tipping during product operation or service. Examples of some acceptable alternatives: The rack or cabinet may be securely bolted to the floor, ceiling or walls, or to adjacent racks or cabinets in a long and heavy row of racks or cabinets. v It is strongly recommended that the mounting rails that are shipped with the product be used to install it in the rack. The mounting rails that ship with IBM products have been designed and tested to safely support the product during operation and service activities. The mounting rails used on products to be serviced by IBM must be certified for use with the products by an NRTL to all applicable country safety standards. Note: IBM requires that mounting rails must be able to support four times the maximum rated product weight in its worst-case position (fully extended front and rear positions) for one full minute without catastrophic failure.
186
Appendix D. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600

IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in the N3600. Note: The N3300 does not support optional adapter cards.
Table 157. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600 Feature Code 1012 1013 1014 1015 1021 1023 1026 1029 1030 1033 1036 1060 1062 1063 1064 Feature Code Description Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for disk attachment Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape attachment Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA Dual-port Mini-SAS Adapter Single-port 10-Gbps NIC Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target adapter (optical) Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target adapter (copper)
For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed one. For the dual-node models the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed two. For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide.
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)

Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. This adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275m using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550m using 50-micron MMF media. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013)

Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This adapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100m using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.
187
Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)

Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN4000). The FC ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.
Table 158. Dual-port 4 Gbps FC HBA for disk - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500m 300m 150m 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300m 150m 70m
For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.
Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015)

Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.
Table 159. Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500m 300m 150m 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300m 150m 70m
For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. This feature code includes a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors.
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021)

Feature code 1021 is a Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI PCIe TCP/IP offload engine (TOE) adapter that provides two optical LC duplex connectors for connection to iSCSI hosts. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.
188
Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023)

Feature code 1023 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standard. It has four RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two.
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026)

Feature code 1026 is a gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target PCIe adapter that provides two Ethernet iSCSI ports to be configured as target connections for iSCSI hosts. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029)
Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN4000) and tape devices to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths:
Table 160. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030)

Feature code 1030 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter may only be used to provide additional target ports; it may not be used to attach storage expansion units. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths:
Table 161. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters
189
Table 161. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths (continued) Link operating speed 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 150 meters 70 meters
For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Note: Feature code 1030 requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher.
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033)

Feature code 1033 is a 4-Gbps PCIe card used to support SnapMirror over Fibre Channel. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Note: Feature code 1033 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.1 or higher.
Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036)

Feature code 1036 is a dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter may only be used to provide additional target ports. It is not used for attaching N series storage expansion units. It auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. This adapter has two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors. This adapter supports the following cable lengths:
Table 162. Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fiber 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fiber 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Note: Feature code 1036 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.1 or higher.
Dual-port Mini-SAS Adapter (FC 1060)

Feature code 1060 is a PCIe adapter with two SAS ports for connecting SAS-based storage (EXN3000) behind the N series controller. The SAS adapter operates at 3 Gbps.
190
For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Note: Feature code 1060 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.
Single-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1062)

Feature code 1062 is a PCIe adapter with one 10-Gb Ethernet port for connecting the N series controller to 10-Gb Ethernet networks. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Note: Feature code 1062 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.
Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063)
Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapter utilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks. The adapter ships with SFPs plugged into the bare cage connectors on the card to attach to LC cables. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Note: Feature code 1063 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.
Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064)
Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapter utilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks. The adapter has bare cage connectors that enable attachment to copper cables with integral SFPs. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Note: Feature code 1064 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.
191
192
Appendix E. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems

The N5200 and N5500 support a variety of optional adapter cards.
Table 163. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 models Feature Code 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1016 1018 1019 1020 1027 1034 Feature Code Description Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateways and MetroCluster filer configurations) Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) (optical) Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (Models A20/G20 only) Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA Note: FC 1034 is supported for N5200 and N5500 systems running Data ONTAP 7.2.2 and higher versions of Data ONTAP 7.2.x. It is not supported for N5200 and N5500 systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode.
The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N5200 and N5500: 1. Fibre Channel host bus adapter (HBA) cards (FC 1004, 1005, 1006, 1018, 1019, 1027, and 1034) 2. Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapters (FC 1010 and 1011) 3. Ethernet Network Interface Cards (FC 1003, 1007, 1008, 1009, and 1020) 4. SCSI Dual-channel Ultra320 LVD adapter for tape attachment (FC 1016) For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, refer to the IBM System Storage N Series Platform Monitoring Guide.
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) (FC 1003)

Feature code 1003 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet network interface card. The adapter supports 10000BASE-SX network topologies. The adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports 50- micron and 62.5-micron multi-mode fibre (MMF). The maximum cable distance is 550 meters using 50-micron MMF and 275 m using 62.5-micron MMF.
193
For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is six. For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority for this adapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority for this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.
Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1004)

Feature code 1004 is a dual-port 2-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA interface for disk storage expansion unit (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) attachment. FC 1004 is used on all models of the N5200 and N5500 filers (A10 and A20) for attaching EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000 disk storage expansion units. This adapter provides two 2-Gbps LC connectors that support 50-micron or 62.5-micron multi-mode fibre. The adapter auto-negotiates to 1 or 2 Gbps. The maximum cable distances supported are shown in Table 164.
Table 164. Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1004) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters
For single-node models (A10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For dual-node models (A20), the maximum number of this adapter is six. For single-node models (A10), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots 2, 3 and 4. For dual-node models (A20), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots 2, 1 and 4.
Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1005)

Feature code 1005 is a dual-port Fibre Channel HBA interface for tape connectivity. This adapter is a 64-bit 133MHx 2 Gbps Fibre Channel adapter. It auto-negotiates to 2 and 1 Gbps. The adapter has two LC style connectors and supports 50-micron and 62.5-micron multi-mode fibre. This adapter supports the maximum cable lengths shown in Table 165.
Table 165. Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1005) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters
For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is six.
194
For single-node models (A10 and G10) the slot priority order for this adapter is slots 4, 3 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20) the slot priority order for this adapter is slots 2, 1 and 4.
Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateway and MetroCluster filer) (FC 1006)
Feature code 1006 is a 2-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment. This adapter provides two 2-Gbps LC connectors that support 50 micron or 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre. The adapter auto-negotiates to 1 or 2 Gbps. The maximum cable distances supported are shown in Table 166
Table 166. Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateway and MetroCluster filer) (FC 1006) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters
This adapter is used for two purposes: v On N5200 and N5500 gateways (G10 and G20), this adapter is used for attaching N5200 or N5500 storage controllers directly to back-end disk systems or to Fibre Channel switches, which are then connected to back-end disk systems. v In a fabric MetroCluster environment, this adapter is used for attaching dual-node N5200 and N5500 filer models (A20) to the Fibre Channel switches that are used in a fabric MetroCluster configuration. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, FC 1018 (Dual-port MetroCluster HBA) is also required. For single-node models (G10) the maximum number of this adapter is three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20) the maximum number of this adapter is six. For single-node models (G10), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is 2, 3 and 4. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is 2, 1, and 4.
Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007)

Feature code 1007 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interface card. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T network topologies. This adapter has four RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum cable distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better 4-pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP) media. For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is four. For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for this adapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for this adapter is slots 1, 2, and 4.
195
Single-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet (10-GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1008)

Feature code 1008 is a single-port 10 GbE (10GBASE-SR) fibre short-range (SR) PCI-X adapter with a single LC duplex connector. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm) multi-mode fibre (MMF) media. For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is four. For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for this adapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.
Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) (FC 1009)

Feature code 1009 is a four-port gigabit Ethernet network interface card that provides full TCP/IP offload engine (TOE) capability and iSCSI acceleration. The TOE function includes TCP and UDP checksum offload and large send offload. The iSCSI acceleration includes header and data digest (CRC) generation and verification. This gigabit Ethernet (1000Base-T) PCI-X TOE feature provides four RJ-45 connectors. The maximum supported distance is 100 meters using Category 5, or better, unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is four. For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for this adapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010)

Feature code 1010 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The adapter has two copper RJ-45 connections. For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is six. For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Feature code 1011 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The adapter has two optical LC duplex connectors. For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is six.
196
For single-node models (A10 and G10) the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.
SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD Tape Adapter (FC 1016)

Feature code 1016 is a SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel LVD adapter. This adapter contains two 68-pin VHDCI external connectors (Channel A and Channel B) and two 68-pin VHDCI internal connectors (Channel A and Channel B). Customers are only expected to use the two external connectors. This feature code includes two SCSI LVD two-meter cables for attaching tape devices to this SCSI HBA. Each cable has two 68-pin VHDCI connectors, one at each end. For single-node models (A10 and G10) the maximum number of this adapter is three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20) the maximum number of this adapter is six. For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots 4, 3, and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots 2, 1 and 4.
Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1018)
Feature code 1018 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is required by MetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remote advanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches are required. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic is carried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normal Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, two of these adapter cards must be ordered (one for each node of a dual-node cluster). This adapter must be installed in slot 2. Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP Version 7.2.3 or later.

Feature code 1019 is a PCI-X dual-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter may only be used to provide additional FCP target ports; it may not be used to attach storage expansion units. FCP target ports are used by application servers on a Fibre Channel storage area network (SAN) for performing I/O to LUNs on the N5200 or N5500 using Fibre Channel Protocol (FCP). It auto-negotiates to speeds of 1, 2, or 4 Gbps. Two SFF multi-mode optical ports with LC connectors support the cable lengths shown in Table 167 on page 198.
197
Table 167. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1019) - Maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
For a single-node model (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is two. For a dual-node model (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is four. For single-node models, the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models, the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Feature code 1020 is a 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. It supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T network topologies. The adapter provides two RJ-45 connections and supports a maximum cable length of 100 meters using Category 5 or better 4-pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP) media. For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is six. For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for Disk (FC 1027)

Feature code 1027 is a quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel host bus adapter (HBA). It auto-negotiates to 4, 2, and 1 Gbps. It may only be used for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. This adapter has four small form factor (SFP) multi-mode optics with LC style connectors. It supports the cable lengths shown in Table 168
Table 168. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1027) - Maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
For single-node models (A10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For dual-node models (A20), the maximum number of this adapter is six.
198
Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.

Feature code 1034 is a 4-Gbps PCI-X card used to support SnapMirror over Fibre Channel. For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is four. Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 3 and 4. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1 and 4. Note: This feature is supported for N5200 and N5500 systems running Data ONTAP 7.2.2 and higher versions of Data ONTAP 7.2.x. It is not supported for N5200 and N5500 systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode.
199
200
Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems

IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in the N5300 and N5600.
Table 169. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 Feature code 1012 1013 1014 1015 1017 1021 1023 1026 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1035 1036 1056 1058 Feature code description Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk/tape attachment Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter Supported platform N5300, N5600 N5300, N5600 N5300, N5600 N5300, N5600 N5300, N5600 N5300, N5600 N5300, N5600 N5300, N5600 N5300, N5600 N5300, N5600 N5300, N5600
Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (A20/G20 models only) N5300, N5600 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA 16-GB Performance Accelerator Module (PAM) N5300, N5600 N5300, N5600 N5300, N5600 N5300, N5600
N5600 256-GB Flash Cache module Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS adapter Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC N5300, N5600 N5300, N5600 N5300, N5600 N5300, N5600
1061 1063 1064 1065
The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N5300 and N5600: 1. Storage adapters for attaching disk storage expansion units (FC 1014, 1029, 1035, 1061) 2. Storage adapters for mirroring or MetroCluster configurations (FC 1032, 1033) 3. Performance Acceleration modules (PAM) or Flash Cache modules (FC 1056, 1058)
201
4. Adapters for host block access (FC 1017, 1021, 1026, 1030, 1063, 1064, 1065) 5. Network Interface cards (1012, 1013, 1023, 1031) 6. Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1015, 1035) For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed three. For the dual-node models the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed six. For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide.

Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. This adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275 meters using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550m using 50-micron MMF media. For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this adapter is six. Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This adapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this adapter is six. Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)
Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching "back-end" storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the maximum cable lengths shown in Table 170 on page 203.
202
Table 170. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this adapter is six. Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015)
Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the maximum cable lengths shown in Table 171.
Table 171. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this adapter is six. Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4. This feature code includes a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors.

Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter is used for providing two additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000s, EXN2000s, and EXN4000s). This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the maximum cable lengths shown in Table 172 on page 204.
203
Table 172. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this adapter is six. Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.
Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) (FC 1021)

Feature code 1021 is a dual-port Ethernet iSCSI adapter. For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this adapter is six. Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Feature code 1023 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standard. It has four RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this adapter is six. Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Feature code 1026 is a dual-port Ethernet iSCSI adapter. For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this adapter is six. Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.
204
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk/tape attachment (FC 1029)
Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape or disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the cable lengths shown in Table 173.
Table 173. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk/tape attachment (FC 1029) maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. For the single-node model (2868/2869-A10) the maximum number of this adapter is three. For the dual-node model (2868/2869-A20) the maximum number of this adapter is six. This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.
Support and cabling rules for the HBA

This HBA supports Fibre Channel storage expansion units and tape devices. It supports all IBM N series Fibre Channel disk devices, subject to current loop mixing restrictions, as well as third-party Fibre Channel tape devices and libraries. You can mix Fibre Channel storage expansion units and Fibre Channel tape devices on the same HBA. You must cable them by port pairs of A/B and C/D, as described in the table below. The following are not supported by these HBAs: v Fabric-attached MetroCluster configurations by the 1035 HBA v Gateway systems v HBA target mode
Cabling rules for stand-alone controllers

The following table shows valid cabling combinations by port and device.
Ports A and B N series storage expansion units N series storage expansion units Tape/library devices Tape/library devices Ports C and D N series storage expansion units Tape/library devices N series storage expansion units Tape/library devices
205

Feature code 1030 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter may only be used to provide additional target ports; it may not be used to attach storage expansion units. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the cable lengths shown in Table 174.
Table 174. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
For the single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10) the maximum number of this adapter is three . For the dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20) the maximum number of this adapter is six. This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4. Note: Feature code 1030 requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher.
Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031)

Feature code 1031 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe TOE adapter feature that provides dual LC duplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media. For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this adapter is six. Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4. Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.3 or later.
Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1032)

Feature code 1032 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is required by MetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remote advanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches are required. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic is carried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normal Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration (2868/2869-A20/G20), two of these adapter cards must be ordered (one for each node of a dual-node cluster). This adapter must be installed in slot 2.
206
Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.3 or later.

Feature code 1033 is a 4-Gbps PCIe card used to support SnapMirror over Fibre Channel. For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is four. Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 3 and 4. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1 and 4. Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.2 or later.
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035)
Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape and disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the cable lengths shown in Table 175.
Table 175. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. For the single-node model (2868/2869-A10) the maximum number of this adapter is three. For the dual-node model (2868/2869-A20) the maximum number of this adapter is six. This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.
Support and cabling rules for the HBA

This HBA supports Fibre Channel storage expansion units and tape devices. It supports all IBM N series Fibre Channel disk devices, subject to current loop mixing restrictions, as well as third-party Fibre Channel tape devices and libraries. You can mix Fibre Channel storage expansion units and Fibre Channel tape devices on the same HBA. You must cable them by port pairs of A/B and C/D, as described in the table below. The following are not supported by these HBAs: v Fabric-attached MetroCluster configurations by the 1035 HBA v Gateway systems
207
v HBA target mode
Cabling rules for stand-alone controllers

The following table shows valid cabling combinations by port and device.
Ports A and B N series storage expansion units N series storage expansion units Tape/library devices Tape/library devices Ports C and D N series storage expansion units Tape/library devices N series storage expansion units Tape/library devices

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.
16-GB Performance Accelerator module (PCIe) (FC 1056)

Feature code 1056 is a PCIe adapter with 16 GB of onboard cache memory that works as a performance acceleration module. It is designed to augment the system's memory and improve performance with some applications when a configuration has a limited number of disks. This design allows the N series disk configuration to be sized based on capacity, rather than performance requirements. Use of the 16-GB Performance Accelerator module (PCIe) (FC 1056) requires the FlexScale software feature. For the single-node N5300 models the maximum number of this adapter is one. For the dual-node N5300 models the maximum number of this adapter is two. For the single-node N5600 models the maximum number of this adapter is two. For the dual-node N5600 models the maximum number of this adapter is four.
208
This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For the N5300: For both single-node and dual-node configurations, the slot priority order is 4, 2. For the N5600: For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 4.
256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058)

Feature code 1058 is a PCIe adapter with 256 GB of onboard cache memory that works as a Flash Cache module. The Flash Cache module is the second generation of PCIe caching module adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improving performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some environments and helping to improve capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix J, Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module, on page 241. Use of the 256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. FC 1058 is not supported for N5300 models. For the single-node N5600 models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For the dual-node N5600 models the maximum number of this adapter is four. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 2. Note: Feature code 1058 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.
Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061)

Feature code 1061 is a PCIe adapter with four SAS ports for connecting N series SAS-based storage (EXN3000) behind the N series controller. The SAS adapter operates at 3 Gbps. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six. For single-node models, the slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2. For dual-node models, the slot priority order for this adapter is 2, 1, 4. Note: Feature code 1061 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.
209
Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapter utilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks. The adapter ships with SFPs plugged into the bare cage connectors on the card to attach to LC cables. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six. For single-node models, the slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 2. For dual-node models, the slot priority order for this adapter is 2, 1, 4. Note: Feature code 1063 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.
Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapter utilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks. The adapter has bare cage connectors that enable attachment to copper cables with integral SFPs. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six. For single-node models, the slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 2. For dual-node models, the slot priority order for this adapter is 2, 1, 4. Note: Feature code 1064 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.
Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065)

Feature code 1065 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter feature that provides dual LC duplex connectors. The adapter has dual bare-cage connectors that require purchasing and inserting FC 2012 (10 GbE SFP+ optic module) to connect to LC cables. Alternatively, you can use FC 1053/1054/1055 copper cables, where appropriate, which have integral SFPs. FC 1065 supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media. Cable feature 10-GbE Fi cable 30m LC/SC (FC 1047) can optionally be ordered with this feature. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six. For single-node models, the slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 2. For dual-node models, the slot priority order for this adapter is 1, 2, 4. Note: Feature code 1065 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.
210
Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems

IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in N6000 series systems.
Table 177. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems Feature Code 1012 1013 1014 1015 1017 1021 1023 1026 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1035 1036 1056 1057 Feature Code Description Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) Supported systems N6040, N6060, N6070 N6040, N6060, N6070 N6040, N6060, N6070 N6040, N6060, N6070 N6040, N6060, N6070 N6040, N6060, N6070 N6040, N6060, N6070 N6040, N6060, N6070
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and N6040, N6060, N6070 tape attachment Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (A20/A21/A22 models only) SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA N6040, N6060, N6070 N6040, N6060, N6070 N6040, N6060, N6070 N6040, N6060, N6070
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and N6040, N6060, N6070 disk attachment Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA 16-GB Performance Acceleration Module (PAM) 512-GB Flash Cache module Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. 256-GB Flash Cache module Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS adapter Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC N6040, N6060, N6070 N6040, N6060, N6070 N6070
1058
N6040, N6060
1061 1063 1064 1065
N6040, N6060, N6070 N6040, N6060, N6070 N6040, N6060, N6070 N6040, N6060, N6070
The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N6000 series system:
211
1. Storage adapters for attaching disk storage expansion units (FC 1014, 1029, 1035, 1061) 2. Storage adapters for mirroring or MetroCluster configurations (FC 1032, 1033) 3. Performance Acceleration modules (PAMs) or Flash Cache modules (FC 1056, 1057, 1058) 4. Adapters for host block access (FC 1017, 1021, 1026, 1030, 1036, 1063, 1064, 1065) 5. Network Interface cards (FC 1012, 1013, 1023, 1031) 6. Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1015, 1029) For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed four. For the dual-node (active/active or high availability) models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed eight. For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide.

Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. This adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275 meters using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550m using 50-micron MMF media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1.

Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This adapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1.
Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.
212
Table 178. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fiber 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fiber 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1.
Table 179. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fiber 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fiber 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1. This feature code includes a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors.

Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter is used for providing two additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching N series storage expansion units. This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.
Table 180. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fiber 500 meters 300 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fiber 300 meters 150 meters
213
Table 180. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) - maximum cable lengths (continued) Link operating speed 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fiber 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fiber 70 meters
For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1.
Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) (FC 1021)

Feature code 1021 is a dual-port Ethernet iSCSI adapter. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1.

Feature code 1023 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standard. It has four RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1.

Feature code 1026 is a dual-port Ethernet iSCSI adapter. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1.
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029)
Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) and tape devices to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths:
214
Table 181. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fiber 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fiber 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 1, 2, 3, 4.
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030)

Table 182. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fiber 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fiber 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
For the single-node model the maximum number of this adapter is four. For the dual-node model the maximum number of this adapter is eight. This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4. Note: Feature code 1030 requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher.

Feature code 1031 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe TOE adapter feature that provides dual LC duplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 1, 2, 3, 4.
215
Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/A21/A22 only) (FC 1032)

Feature code 1032 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is required by MetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remote advanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches are required. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic is carried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normal Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, two of these adapter cards must be ordered (one for each node of a dual-node cluster). This adapter must be installed in slot 1.

Feature code 1033 is a 4-Gbps PCIe card used to support SnapMirror over Fibre Channel. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. The slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4.
Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape and supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths:
Table 183. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fiber 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fiber 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. Note: This adapter is not supported for N6000 series MetroCluster configurations or filers with gateway features. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 1, 2, 3, 4.
216

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1.
16 GB Performance Acceleration Module (FC 1056)

Feature code 1056 is a PCIe adapter with 16 GB of onboard cache memory that works as a performance acceleration module. It is designed to augment the system's memory and improve performance with some applications when a configuration has a limited number of disks. This design allows the N series disk configuration to be sized based on capacity, rather than performance requirements. For more information about PAM cards, see Appendix J, Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module, on page 241. Use of the 16 GB Performance Acceleration Module I (FC 1056) requires the FlexScale software feature. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four for the N6070 and two for the N6040 or N6060. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For both single-node and dual-node configurations, the slot priority order is 1, 2. 3. 4. Note: Feature code 1056 requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher.

Feature code 1057 is a PCIe adapter with 512 GB of onboard cache memory that works as a Flash Cache module. The Flash Cache module is the second generation of caching module adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improving performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some environments and helping to improve capacity utilization. For more
217
information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix J, Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module, on page 241. Use of the 512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. For the single-node N6070, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For the dual-node N6070, the maximum number of this adapter is four. This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For both single-node and dual-node configurations, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4. Note: Feature code 1057 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.

Feature code 1058 is a PCIe adapter with 256 GB of onboard cache memory that works as a Flash Cache module. The Flash Cache module is the second generation of caching module adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improving performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some environments and helping to improve capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix J, Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module, on page 241. Use of the 256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. For the single-node N6040, the maximum number of this adapter is one. For the dual-node N6040, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For the single-node N6060, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For the dual-node N6060, the maximum number of this adapter is four. The slot priority order for this adapter is 1, 2, 3, 4. Note: Feature code 1058 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.

Feature code 1061 is a PCIe adapter with four SAS ports for connecting N series SAS-based storage (EXN3000) behind the N series controller. The SAS adapter operates at 3 Gbps. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 1, 2, 3, 4.
218
Note: Feature code 1061 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.
Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapter utilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1. Note: Feature code 1063 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.
Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapter utilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1. Note: Feature code 1064 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.

Feature code 1065 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter feature provides dual LC duplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media. Cable features 5m 50-micron MMF Cable (FC 1045), 30m 50-micron MMF Cable (FC 1046), 10-GbE Fi cable 30m LC/SC (FC 1047), or 10-GbE Fi cable 5m LC/SC (FC 1048) can optionally be ordered with this feature. FC 1045 and FC 1046 are LC/LC cables; FC 1047 and FC 1048 are LC/SC cables. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 1, 2, 3, 4. Note: Feature code 1065 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.
219
220
Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems

IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in N6200 series systems.
Table 185. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems Feature Code 1012 1014 1015 1017 1023 1029 1030 1035 1036 1057 1058 1061 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 Feature Code Description Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA 512-GB Flash Cache module 256-GB Flash Cache module Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS adapter Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC 8-Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA 8-Gbps SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA Supported models All N6200 series models All N6200 series models All N6200 series models All N6200 series models All N6200 series models All N6200 series models All N6200 series models All N6200 series models All N6200 series models N6240 only All N6200 series models All N6200 series models All N6200 series models All N6200 series models All N6200 series models N6210-C20 and N6240-E21 only All N6200 series models
The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N6200 series system: 1. Storage adapters for attaching disk storage expansion units (FC 1014, 1029, 1035, 1061) 2. Storage adapters for mirroring or MetroCluster configurations (FC 1066, 1067) 3. 4. 5. 6. Flash Cache modules (FC 1057, 1058) Adapters for host block access (FC 1017, 1030, 1036, 1063, 1064, 1065) Network Interface cards (FC 1012) Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1015)
For model C10, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed two. For models C20 and C21, the total number cannot exceed four. For model E11, the total number cannot exceed 6. For model E21, the total number cannot exceed 12.
221
For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide.

Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. This adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275 meters using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550 meters using 50-micron MMF media. For N6210-C10, N6210-C20 and N6240-C21: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2.
Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.
Table 186. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fiber 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fiber 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
For N6210-C10, N6210-C20 and N6240-C21: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2.
Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This feature code includes a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors. This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optical ports with LC connectors. The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.
222
Table 187. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fiber 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fiber 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters

Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter is used for providing two additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching N series storage expansion units. Note: All FC target ports must be either onboard FC ports or FC HBA ports (using FC 1017); they may not be used in combination. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.

Feature code 1023 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standard. It has four RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For N6210-C10, N6210-C20 and N6240-C21: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2.
223
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029)
Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths:
Table 189. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fiber 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fiber 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. For N6210-C10, N6210-C20 and N6240-C21: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2.
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030)

Table 190. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fiber 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fiber 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
For N6210-C10, N6210-C20 and N6240-C21: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: For systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.5, the maximum number of this adapter is four per controller module. For systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.1 and later, the maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2.
224
Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape and supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths:
Table 191. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fiber 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fiber 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
Note: The ports of this adapter cannot be used as FCP target ports. This adapter cannot be used for MetroCluster configurations. For N6210-C10, N6210-C20 and N6240-C21: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2.

Feature code 1036 is a dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter is only used to provide additional target ports. It is not used for attaching N series storage expansion units. It auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. This adapter has two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors. This adapter supports the following cable lengths:
225

Feature code 1057 is a PCIe adapter with 512 GB of onboard cache memory that works as a Flash Cache module. Feature code 1057 is only supported for the N6240. The Flash Cache module is the second generation of caching module designed for N series systems. It augments the system's onboard memory, improving performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some environments and helping to improve capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix J, Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module, on page 241. Use of the 512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. For all models, the maximum number of this adapter is one per controller module. For N6210-C10, N6210-C20 and N6240-C21: The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.

Feature code 1058 is a PCIe adapter with 256 GB of onboard cache memory that works as a Flash Cache module. The Flash Cache module is the second generation of caching module designed for N series systems. It augments the system's onboard memory, improving performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some environments and helping to improve capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix J, Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module, on page 241. Use of the 256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. For N6210-C10 and N6210-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is one per controller node. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-C21, N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller node. The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.

Feature code 1061 is a PCIe adapter with four SAS ports for connecting N series SAS-based storage (EXN3000) behind the N series controller. The SAS adapter operates at 3 Gbps. For N6210-C10, N6210-C20 and N6240-C21: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2.
226
Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapter utilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks. For N6210-C10, N6210-C20 and N6240-C21: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.
Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapter utilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks. For N6210-C10, N6210-C20 and N6240-C21: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.
Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet NIC (FC 1065)

Feature code 1065 is a dual-port 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter feature that provides two SFP+ ports on the adapter. To use optical LC fiber optic cables, one SFP+ optical module (FC 2012) is required for each optical port. To connect to a switch using copper SFP+ cables, use one FC 1055 per port (each feature provides one passive, copper, SFP+ cable). For N6210-C10, N6210-C20 and N6240-C21: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.
8-Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1066)

FC 1066 is PCIe adapter is used only in support of the MetroCluster license function feature and compatible switches. It provides the connection heartbeat for the cluster over a Fibre Channel link. One is used per node in a Fabric MetroCluster implementation. This adapter is not required for Stretch MetroCluster installations. FC 1066 is supported only for the N6210-C20 and N6240-E21 models. For all supported N6200 series models, the maximum number of this adapter is one per controller node.
227
8-Gbps SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1067)

FC 1067 provides one 8-Gb PCIe card for support of SnapMirror over Fibre Channel. Use this feature to configure 8-Gbps Fibre Channel for SnapMirror. For all supported N6200 series models, the maximum number of this adapter is one per controller module. The slot priority is 2.
228
Appendix I. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems

IBM supports optional adapter cards in the N7000 series models. The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N7000 series models: 1. Storage adapters for attaching disk storage expansion units or disk systems (FC 1014, 1029, 1035, 1061) 2. Storage adapters for mirroring and MetroCluster configurations (FC 1032, 1033 and 1034) 3. Performance Acceleration modules (PAM) or Flash Cache modules (FC 1056, 1057) 4. Storage adapter for host block access (FC 1010, 1011, 1017, 1021, 1026, 1030, 1036, 1063, 1064, 1065) 5. Network Interface cards (FC 1007, 1008, 1009, 1012, 1013, 1023, 1031) 6. Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1016, 1015, 1029. 1035)
PCI-X Adapters
All N7000 models support the following PCI-X adapters.
Table 193. Optional PCI-X Adapters Feature Code 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1016 1034 Feature Code Description Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) TOE (optical) Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) TOE (copper) Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) iSCSI target adapter (copper) Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) iSCSI target adapter (optical) SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel tape HBA SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA Note: FC 1034 is supported for N7000 series systems running Data ONTAP 7.2.2 and higher versions of Data ONTAP 7.2.x. It is not supported for N7000 series systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode. Models Supported N7700, N7900 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800
For single-node models, the total number of PCI-X adapters cannot exceed three. For dual-node models, the total number of PCI-X adapters cannot exceed six. For dual-node models, adapters must be ordered in pairs, one for each node.
Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007)

Feature code 1007 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interface card. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T network
229
topologies. This adapter has four RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum cable distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better 4-pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP) media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The slot priority order for this adapter is 9, 3, 4. Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.6 or later.
Single-port 10 GbE TOE adapter (FC 1008)

Feature code 1008 is a single-port 10 GbE (10GBASE-SR) fibre short-range (SR) PCI-X adapter with a single LC duplex connector. This adapter supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using 850 nanometer (nm) multi-mode fibre (MMF) media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3 or 9. The slot priority order for this adapter is slot 9, 3. For technical reasons, this TOE adapter is not permitted in slot 4.
Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet TOE adapter (FC 1009)

Feature code 1009 is a quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T) adapter. The adapter has four copper RJ-45 connections. This adapter supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3 or 9. The slot priority order for this adapter is slot 9, 3. For technical reasons, this TOE adapter is not permitted in slot 4.

Feature code 1010 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The adapter has two copper RJ-45 connections. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six. Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 9.

Feature code 1011 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The adapter has two optical LC duplex connectors. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six.
230
Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 9.
SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter (FC 1016)

Feature code 1016 is a SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel LVD adapter. This adapter contains two 68-pin VHDCI external connectors (Channel A and Channel B) and two 68-pin VHDCI internal connectors (Channel A and Channel B). Customers are only expected to use the two external connectors. This feature code includes two SCSI LVD two-meter cables for attaching tape devices to this SCSI HBA. Each cable has two 68-pin VHDCI connectors, one at each end. For the single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For the dual-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is six. Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 9, 3.

Feature code 1034 is a 4-Gbps PCI-X card used to support SnapMirror over Fibre Channel. For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is four. Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 9. Note: FC 1034 is supported for N7000 series systems running Data ONTAP 7.2.2 and higher versions of Data ONTAP 7.2.x. It is not supported for N7000 series systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode.
PCI-Express (PCIe) adapters

N7000 series models support the following PCIe adapters.
Table 194. Optional PCIe adapters Feature Code 1012 1013 1014 1015 1017 1021 Feature Code Description Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) Models Supported N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800
231
Table 194. Optional PCIe adapters (continued) Feature Code 1023 1026 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1035 1036 1056 1057 Feature Code Description Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk or tape attachment Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (A20/A21 models only) SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA Models Supported N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and N7700, N7900, N7600, disk attachment N7800 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter 16-GB Performance Acceleration Module (PAM) 512-GB Flash Cache module Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS adapter Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target adapter (optical) Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target adapter (copper) Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800
1061 1063 1064 1065
N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800
For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed five. For the dual-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed ten.

Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. This adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275m using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550 meters using 50-micron MMF media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.
232

Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This adapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better UTP four-pair media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.
Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.
Table 195. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.
Table 196. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
233
For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. This feature code will include a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors.

Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter is used for providing two additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching storage expansion units. This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.
Table 197. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Feature code 1021 is a Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI PCIe TCP/IP offload engine (TOE) adapter that provides two optical LC duplex connectors for connection to iSCSI hosts. For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For dual-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Feature code 1023 is a 10/100/1000 Ethernet (10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 1000Base-T) PCIe feature that provides four RJ-45 connectors. The maximum supported distance is 100 meters using Category 5, or better, unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten.
234
This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026)

Feature code 1026 is a gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target PCIe adapter that provides two Ethernet iSCSI ports to be configured as target connections for iSCSI hosts. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk or tape attachment (FC 1029)
Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN4000) or tape devices to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths:
Table 198. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk or tape attachment (FC 1029) maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Table 199. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters
235
Table 199. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths (continued) Link operating speed 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 150 meters 70 meters
For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Note: Feature code 1030 requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher.

Feature code 1031 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe TOE adapter feature that provides dual LC duplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.3 or later.
Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/A21 only) (FC 1032)

Feature code 1032 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is required by MetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remote advanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches are required. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic is carried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normal Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration (2866/2867-A20/A21), two of these adapter cards must be ordered (one for each node of a dual-node cluster). This adapter must be installed in slot 1. Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.3 or later.

Feature code 1033 is a 4-Gbps PCIe card used to support SnapMirror over Fibre Channel. For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is four.
236
This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8. Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.2 or later.
Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape and supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths:
Table 200. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters
The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. Note: This adapter is not supported for N7000 series MetroCluster configurations or filers with gateway features. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.
Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1036)

Feature code 1036 is a PCIe dual-port 8-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter may only be used to provide additional target ports; it may not be used to attach storage expansion units or backend gateway storage. It auto-negotiates connections of 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps, 4 Gbps, or 8 Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths:
Table 201. Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1036) - maximum cable lengths Link operating speed 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 8 Gbps 50 micron multi-mode fibre 500 meters 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre 300 meters 150 meters 70 meters 21 meters
237
This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.3.1, or later. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.
16-GB Performance Acceleration Module I (FC 1056)

Feature code 1056 is a PCIe adapter with 16 GB of onboard cache memory that works as a performance acceleration module. It is designed to augment the system's memory and improve performance with some applications when a configuration has a limited number of disks. This design allows the N series disk configuration to be sized based on capacity, rather than performance requirements. For more information about PAM cards, see Appendix J, Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module, on page 241. Use of the 16-GB Performance Acceleration Module I (FC 1056) requires the FlexScale software feature. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four for the N7600 and N7700 and five for the N7800 and N7900. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight for the N7600 and N7700 and ten for the N7800 and N7900. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For all models of the N7600 and N7700: The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7 and 8. For single-node models of the N7800 and N7900: The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8 and 1. For dual-node models of the N7800 and N7900: The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8 and 2.

Feature code 1057 is a PCIe adapter with 512 GB of onboard cache memory that works as a Flash Cache module. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improving performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some environments and helping to improve capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix J, Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module, on page 241. Use of the 512 GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II.
238
For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two for the N7600 and N7700 and four for the N7800 and N7900. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four for the N7600 and N7700 and eight for the N7800 and N7900. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8. The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7 and 8. Notes: 1. For the N7600, N7700 and N7900, feature code 1057 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher. 2. For the N7800, feature code 1057 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.3 or higher.

Feature code 1061 is a PCIe adapter with four SAS ports for connecting N series SAS-based storage (EXN3000) behind the N series controller. The SAS adapter operates at 3 Gbps. For single-node models the maximum number of this adapter is five. For dual-node models the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Note: Feature code 1061 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.
Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapter utilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks. For single-node models the maximum number of this adapter is five. For dual-node models the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Note: Feature code 1063 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.
Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapter utilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks. For single-node models the maximum number of this adapter is five. For dual-node models the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.
239
Note: Feature code 1064 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.

Feature code 1065 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter feature provides dual LC duplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media. Cable features 5m 50-micron MMF Cable (FC 1045), 30m 50-micron MMF Cable (FC 1046), 10-GbE Fi cable 30m LC/SC (FC 1047), or 10-GbE Fi cable 5m LC/SC (FC 1048) can optionally be ordered with this feature. FC 1045 and FC 1046 are LC/LC cables; FC 1047 and FC 1048 are LC/SC cables. For single-node models the maximum number of this adapter is five. For dual-node models the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Note: Feature code 1065 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher.
240
Appendix J. Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module

This section contains information and processes for the following: v System requirements v Before you begin v Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module on page 242 v Enabling the WAFL extended cache software license and functionality on page 243 v Enabling the WAFL extended cache configuration options on page 243 v Completing the replacement process on page 244 For information about the Performance Acceleration Module (PAM) LEDs, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide or to the flyer that shipped with your PAM.
System requirements
Your system must be running the minimum version of Data ONTAP required for your module type. For the most up-to-date information about supported Data ONTAP versions for your module, see the IBM System Storage N series Introduction and Planning Guide (this document) or the Hardware and Service Guide for your N series system, located at: www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas
Before you begin

Depending on whether you are installing a Performance Acceleration Module for the first time, replacing an existing module, or installing an additional module, your system must meet the criteria specified for your applicable installation type below.
First time installations:

v Your system must be running the minimum version of Data ONTAP required for the module type you are installing. v The platform on which you are installing the module must be supported. For the most up-to-date list of supported platforms, see the IBM System Storage N series Introduction and Planning Guide (this document) or the Hardware and Service Guide for your N series system, located at: www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas v Your system must have an available PCI-e slot (one slot for each module), and you must have checked the IBM System Storage N series Introduction and Planning Guide (this document) or the Hardware and Service Guide for your N series system. v You must have the software license key and download instructions that came with your order. v If you are installing the module in an active/active or high availability configuration, you must install an equal number of modules in each system. v All other components in the system must be functioning properly.
241
Replacement or additional module installations

v Your system must be running the minimum version of Data ONTAP required for the module type you are installing. v If you are installing additional modules in an active/active or high availability configuration, you must install an equal number of modules in each system. v If you are installing additional modules, your system must have an available PCI-e slot (one slot for each module), and you must have checked the IBM System Storage N series Introduction and Planning Guide (this document) or the Hardware and Service Guide for your N series system for the assigned module slots for your system. v If you are installing additional modules, they must be the same type module as you currently have installed. You cannot mix 16-GB, 256-GB, and 512-GB modules in the same system. v If you are upgrading the 16-GB modules in your system with 256-GB or 512-GB modules, you must have the correct software license for your replacement module type. There are two different WAFL extended cache software licenses. One is used with the 16-GB module and one is used with the 256-GB and 512-GB modules. v All other components in the system must be functioning properly.
Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module

Attention: This procedure is disruptive for single-controller configurations, and is recommended to be performed on single-controller configurations only during a maintenance window. For active/active or high availability configurations, this is a nondisruptive procedure. To install or replace a module, complete the following steps: 1. Shut down the controller module. See the Hardware and Service Guide for your applicable platform. 2. Open your system. See the Hardware and Service Guide for your applicable platform. 3. Remove an existing module (if necessary). See the Hardware and Service Guide for your applicable platform. For detailed information, see the section Replacing PCI Cards and Risers or Replacing PCI adapters. 4. Install the module. See the Hardware and Service Guide for your applicable platform. For detailed information, see the section Replacing PCI Cards and Risers or Replacing PCI adapters. Note: For active/active or high availability configurations, if you are installing a module for the first time or adding an additional module, you must install an equal number of modules in each node. 5. Close and boot your system. See the Hardware and Service Guide for your applicable platform. 6. Run diagnostics on the new module (for first time installations only). See the IBM System Storage N series Diagnostics Guide for information about specific diagnostics tests you can perform for PCI cards, located at: www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas
242
7. Complete the installation process: v If you are installing an additional module in a system with preexisting modules, you have completed the installation process. v If you are replacing a failed module, go to step 10. v If you are installing a module for the first time in a system or upgrading the 16-GB modules in your system with 256-GB or 512-GB modules, complete steps 8 and 9. 8. Enable the WAFL extended cache software. See Enabling the WAFL extended cache software license and functionality. 9. Set the software configuration options. See Enabling the WAFL extended cache configuration options. 10. Complete the replacement process. See Completing the replacement process on page 244.
Enabling the WAFL extended cache software license and functionality

For first-time installations of a module or upgrading the 16-GB modules in your system with 256-GB or 512-GB modules, complete the following steps: Note: There are two different WAFL extended cache software licenses. One is used with the 16-GB module and one is used with the 256-GB and 512-GB modules. You must have the correct software license for your module type. Note: See the software license key and download instructions that came with your order. 1. From the console, enable the WAFL extended cache software license by entering the following command: license add license key Result: WAFL extended cache functionality should be enabled automatically. 2. Verify that WAFL extended cache functionality is enabled by entering the following command: options flexscale.enable Result: Should be on. 3. Enable the WAFL extended cache configuration options. v If your system is in a single-controller module configuration, go to Enabling the WAFL extended cache configuration options. v If your system is in an active/active or high availability configuration, repeat Steps 1 and 2 of this procedure for each node, and then go to Enabling the WAFL extended cache configuration options.
Enabling the WAFL extended cache configuration options

WAFL extended cache configuration options enable you to optimize performance for your particular workload. Depending on your workload, the following options can apply: v Caching normal user data blocks v Caching low-priority user data blocks v Caching only system metadata v Integrating FlexShare buffer cache policies with WAFL extended cache options
Appendix J. Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module
243
Note: You can set the WAFL extended cache configuration options during module installation or later. However, it is recommended that you set options at the time of installation to ensure optimal performance for your workload. To enable WAFL extended cache configuration options, complete the following steps: 1. Read about the WAFL extended cache configuration options in the Data ONTAP System Administration Guide. You can access this document at: www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas Note: Knowing your application and volume configuration helps you decide what configuration options to choose. 2. Follow the applicable option enabling procedures in the Data ONTAP System Administration Guide. Note: For active/active or high availability configurations, you must configure options on each node.
Completing the replacement process

If you have replaced a failed module, return the failed part to IBM. Contact IBM Service and Support at 1-800-IBM-SERV (1-800-426-7378) for more information on the return procedure.
244
Appendix K. IBM System Storage N series documentation

The following lists present an overview of the IBM System Storage N series hardware and Data ONTAP product libraries, as well as other related documents. You can access the documents listed in these tables at the following web site: www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/
N7000 series systems library

v IBM System Storage N7000 Series Hardware and Service Guide, GC26-7953 v IBM System Storage N7000 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions, GC26-7954 v IBM System Storage N7000 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions, GC26-7956

v IBM System Storage N6000 Series Hardware and Service Guide, GC53-1142-00 v IBM System Storage N6000 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions, GC53-1143-00 v IBM System Storage N6000 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions, GC53-1144-00

v IBM System Storage N5000 Series Hardware and Service Guide, GC26-7785 v IBM System Storage N5000 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions, GC26-7784 v IBM System Storage N5000 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions, GC26-7838
N3300, N3400 and N3600 storage systems library

v IBM System GC27-2280 v IBM System v IBM System v IBM System Storage N3300, N3400 and N3600 Hardware and Service Guide, Storage N3300 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2086 Storage N3400 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2279 Storage N3600 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2089
N3700 storage system library

v IBM System Storage N3700 Hardware and Service Guide, GA32-0515 v IBM System Storage N3700 Installation and Setup Instructions, GA32-0517
EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN3000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units library

v IBM System Storage EXN1000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service Guide, GC26-7802 v IBM System Storage EXN1000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC26-7786
245
v IBM System Storage Guide, GA32-0516 v IBM System Storage v IBM System Storage Guide, GC52-1346 v IBM System Storage v IBM System Storage Guide, GC27-2080 v IBM System Storage
EXN2000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service EXN2000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2064 EXN3000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service EXN3000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC52-1345 EXN4000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service EXN4000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2079
Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode library

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode GA32-0723-00 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode GA32-0724-00 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Management Guide for iSCSI and FCP, GA32-0725-00 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Configuration Guide, GA32-0726-00 Release Notes, Upgrade Guide, Block Access High Availability
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Commands: Manual Page Reference, Volume 1, GA32-0727-00 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Commands: Manual Page Reference, Volume 2, GA32-0728-00 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Core Commands Quick Reference, GA32-0729-00 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 Backup and Recovery Guide, GA32-0730-00 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 Backup and Recovery Guide, GA32-0731-00 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 Protocols Management Guide, GA32-0732-00 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 Guide, GA32-0733-00 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 Guide, GA32-0734-00 7-Mode Data Protection Online 7-Mode Data Protection Tape 7-Mode File Access and 7-Mode MultiStore Management 7-Mode Network Management
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Software Setup Guide, GA32-0735-00 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Storage Management Guide, GA32-0736-00 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode System Administration Guide, GA32-0737-00 v IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for the Data ONTAP 8.0 Release Family, GA32-0783
Data ONTAP 7.3 library

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3.x Release Notes, GC53-1175
246
Note: Beginning with Data ONTAP 7.3.1, a single Data ONTAP 7.3.x Release Notes covers both filers and gateways. v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3.Release Notes, GC27-2201 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Active/Active Configuration Guide, GC27-2208 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 File Access and Protocols Management Guide, GC27-2207 v IBM System Storage N series Data GC52-1277 v IBM System Storage N series Data and Recovery Guide, GC27-2204 v IBM System Storage N series Data Recovery Guide, GC27-2205 v IBM System Storage N series Data GC52-1281 v IBM System Storage N series Data GC52-1280 ONTAP 7.3 Storage Management Guide, ONTAP 7.3 Data Protection Online Backup ONTAP 7.3 Data Protection Tape Backup and ONTAP 7.3 MultiStore Management Guide, ONTAP 7.3 Network Management Guide,
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Commands: Manual Page Reference, Volume 1, GC27-2202 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Commands: Manual Page Reference, Volume 2, GC27-2203 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Upgrade Guide, GC27-2200 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Block Access Management Guide for iSCSI and FCP, GC52-1282 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 System Administration Guide, GC52-1279 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Software Setup Guide, GC27-2206 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Core Commands Quick Reference, GC52-1278 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Archive and Compliance Management Guide, GC53-1168 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Storage Efficiency Management Guide, GA32-0773 v IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for the Data ONTAP 7.3 Release Family, GC53-1300

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2.x Release Notes, GC26-7963 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Active/Active Configuration Guide, GC26-7964 v IBM System Storage N series Data Management Guide, GC26-7965 v IBM System Storage N series Data GC26-7966 v IBM System Storage N series Data and Recovery Guide, GC26-7967 v IBM System Storage N series Data Recovery Guide, GC26-7968 ONTAP 7.2 File Access and Protocols ONTAP 7.2 Storage Management Guide, ONTAP 7.2 Data Protection Online Backup ONTAP 7.2 Data Protection Tape Backup and
247
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 MultiStore Management Guide, GC26-7969 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Network Management Guide, GC26-7970 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Commands: Manual Page Reference, Volume 1, GC26-7971 v IBM System Storage N series Data Reference, Volume 2, GC26-7972 v IBM System Storage N series Data v IBM System Storage N series Data for iSCSI & FCP, GC26-7973 v IBM System Storage N series Data GC26-7974 v IBM System Storage N series Data GC26-7975 v IBM System Storage N series Data Reference, GC26-7977 ONTAP 7.2 Commands: Manual Page ONTAP 7.2 Upgrade Guide, GC26-7976 ONTAP 7.2 Block Access Management Guide ONTAP 7.2 System Administration Guide, ONTAP 7.2 Software Setup Guide, ONTAP 7.2 Core Commands Quick
v IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for Data ONTAP 7.2 and Earlier Release Families, GC53-1182

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1.x Release Notes, GC26-7862 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Cluster Installation and Management Guide, GC26-7790 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 File Access and Protocols Management Guide, GA32-0520 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Storage Management Guide, GA32-0521 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Data Protection Online Backup and Recovery Guide, GA32-0522 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Data Protection Tape Backup and Recovery Guide, GA32-0523 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 MultiStore Management Guide, GA32-0524 v IBM System Storage N series Data GA32-0525 v IBM System Storage N series Data Reference, Volume 1, GA32-0526 v IBM System Storage N series Data Reference, Volume 2, GA32-0527 v IBM System Storage N series Data v IBM System Storage N series Data for iSCSI and FCP, GA32-0528 ONTAP 7.1 Network Management Guide, ONTAP 7.1 Commands: Manual Page ONTAP 7.1 Commands: Manual Page ONTAP 7.1 Upgrade Guide, GC26-7791 ONTAP 7.1 Block Access Management Guide
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 System Administration Guide, GA32-0529 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Software Setup Guide, GA32-0530 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Core Commands Quick Reference, GA32-0531
248
v IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for Data ONTAP 7.2 and Earlier Release Families, GC53-1182
Data ONTAP 7.2 and later gateway systems library

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2.x Gateway Release Notes, GC26-7955 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Gateway Release Notes, GC27-2189 v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3.x Release Notes, GC53-1175 Note: Beginning with Data ONTAP 7.3.1, a single Data ONTAP 7.3.x Release Notes will cover both filers and gateways. IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide, GC53-1150 IBM System Storage N series Gateway Upgrade Guide, GC26-1166 IBM System Storage N series Gateway Software Setup, Installation, and Management Guide, GC53-1147 IBM System Storage N series Gateway Installation Requirements and Reference Guide, GC53-1148 IBM System Storage N series Gateway Metrocluster Guide, GC53-1149 IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for Native Disk Shelves, GC27-2188 (for Data ONTAP 7.3 and later gateways only) IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for EMC Symmetrix Storage, GC27-2190 IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for HP EVA Storage, GC27-2192 Implementation Guide for HP XP Implementation Guide for 3PAR InServ Implementation Guide for EMC Implementation Guide for IBM Storage, Implementation Guide for IBM SAN Implementation Guide for Hitachi
v v v v v v v v
v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Storage, GC27-2193 v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Storage, GC27-2195 v IBM System Storage N series Gateway CLARiiON Storage, GC27-2191 v IBM System Storage N series Gateway GC27-2194 v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Volume Controller Storage, GC53-1151 v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Storage, GC53-1164
v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for Fujitsu ETERNUS Storage, GC53-1165 v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for RamSan Storage, GC52-1342 v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for IBM XIV Storage, , GA32-0794
Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems library

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide, GC26-7839 v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Integration Guide for IBM Storage, GC26-7840
249
v IBM System Storage N series Gateway GC26-7841 v IBM System Storage N series Gateway GC26-7858 v IBM System Storage N series Gateway v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Management Guide, GC26-7886
Integration Guide for Hitachi Storage, Integration Guide for HP Storage, Software Upgrade Guide, GC26-7859 Software Setup, Installation, and
v IBM System Storage N series Gateway 7.1.x Release Notes, GC26-7837
Other N series and N series-related documents

v IBM System Storage N Series Platform Monitoring Guide, GC27-2088 (previously called the IBM System Storage N series Error Messages and Troubleshooting Guide, GC26-7984) v v v v IBM System Storage N series Diagnostics Guide, GC26-7789 IBM System Storage N series Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0543 IBM System Storage N series AutoSupport Overview, GC26-7854 IBM System Storage N series: Changing the cluster cfmode Setting in Fibre Channel SAN Configurations, GC26-7876
v IBM System Storage N series Brocade 200E and Brocade 5000 Switch Configuration Guide, GC52-1284 v IBM System Storage N series Brocade 3000 Series Switch Configuration Guide, GC52-1285 v IBM System Storage N series Brocade 300 and Brocade 5100 Switch Configuration Guide, GC53-1167 v IBM System Storage N series MetroCluster Redbook, REDP-4243-00 v IBM System Storage Systems Safety Notices, G229-9054 v IBM Environmental Notices and User Guide Z125-5823 v IBM Storage Solution Rack 2101 Rack Installation and Service Guide: Models 200 and N00, GC26-7993 v IBM Storage Solution Rack 2101 Rack Installation and Service Guide: Model N42, GC53-1174
250
Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A. IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service. IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to: IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk, NY 10504-1785 U.S.A. The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATIONS AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publications. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. Any references in this information to non-IBM web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those web sites. The materials at those web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those web sites is at your own risk. IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Attention: In compliance with the GNU General Public License (GPL), Version 2, June 1991, a complete machine-readable copy of the source code for the relevant source code portions of the Remote LAN Module (RLM) Firmware that are covered by the GPL, is available from ftp://ftp.netapp.com/frm-ntap/opensource/.
Copyrights
Copyright 2005, 2011 IBM Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
251
References in this documentation to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program or service is not intended to state or imply that only IBM's product, program or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program or service that does not infringe any of IBM's intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product, program or service. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the user's responsibility.
Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. A complete and current list of other IBM trademarks is available on the web at http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml NetApp, the Network Appliance logo, the bolt design, NetAppthe Network Appliance Company, Data ONTAP, DataFabric, FAServer, FilerView, gFiler, MultiStore, NearStore, NetCache, SecureShare, SnapManager, SnapMirror, SnapMover, SnapRestore, SnapVault, SyncMirror, and WAFL are registered trademarks of Network Appliance, Inc. in the United States, and/or other countries. gFiler, Network Appliance, SnapCopy, SnapLock, Snapshot, and The Evolution of Storage are trademarks of Network Appliance, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries and registered trademarks in some other countries. ApplianceWatch, BareMetal, Camera-to-Viewer, ComplianceClock, ComplianceJournal, ContentDirector, ContentFabric, EdgeFiler, FlexClone, FlexVol, FPolicy, HyperSAN, InfoFabric, LockVault, Manage ONTAP, NOW, NOW NetApp on the web, ONTAPI, RAID-DP, RoboCache, RoboFiler, SecureAdmin, Serving Data by Design, SharedStorage, Simulate ONTAP, Smart SAN, SnapCache, SnapDirector, SnapDrive, SnapFilter, SnapMigrator, SnapSuite, SnapValidator, SohoFiler, vFiler, VFM, Virtual File Manager, VPolicy, and Web Filer are trademarks of Network Appliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. NetApp Availability Assurance and NetApp ProTech Expert are service marks of Network Appliance, Inc. in the United States. Network Appliance is a licensee of the CompactFlash and CF Logo trademarks. Intel and Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries. All other brands or products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders and should be treated as such.
Electronic emission notices

The following statements apply to this product. The statements for other products intended for use with this product will appear in their accompanying manuals.
252
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Class A Statement

This equipment has been tested and complies with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Avis de conformit la rglementation d'Industrie Canada

Cet appareil numrique de la classe A est conform la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
European Union EMC Directive Conformance Statement

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards. Attention: This is an EN55022 Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. Responsible manufacturer: International Business Machines Corp. New Orchard Road Armonk, New York 10504 Tel: 919-499-1900 European community contact: IBM Technical Regulations, Department M456 IBM-Allee 1, 71137 Ehningen, Germany Tel: +49 7032 15-2937 E-mail: tjahn@de.ibm.com
Notices
253
Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis: Hinweis fr Gerte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der IBM empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der IBM verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden. EN 55022 Klasse A Gerte mssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden: "Warnung: Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funk-Strungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Manahmen zu ergreifen und dafr aufzukommen." Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten Dieses Produkt entspricht dem "Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten (EMVG)". Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland. Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten (EMVG) (bzw. der EMC EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EG) fr Gerte der Klasse A Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformittszeichen - CE - zu fhren. Verantwortlich fr die Einhaltung der EMV Vorschriften ist der Hersteller: International Business Machines Corp. New Orchard Road Armonk, New York 10504 Tel: 919-499-1900 Der verantwortliche Ansprechpartner des Herstellers in der EU ist: IBM Deutschland Technical Regulations, Department M456 IBM-Allee 1, 71137 Ehningen, Germany Tel: +49 7032 15-2937 E-mail: tjahn@de.ibm.com Generelle Informationen: Das Gert erfllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse A.
254
People's Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission Statement
Japan VCCI Council Class A Statement
Translation: This is a Class A product based on the standard of the VCCI Council. If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio interference may occur, in which case, the user may be required to take corrective actions.
Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) Statement

Japanese Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) Confirmed Harmonics Guideline (products less than or equal to 20 A per phase).
Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) Statement

Japanese Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) Confirmed Harmonics Guideline (products greater than 20 A per phase).
Korea Communications Commission (KCC) Statement

Please note that this equipment has obtained EMC registration for commercial use. In the event that it has been mistakenly sold or purchased, please exchange it for equipment certified for home use.
jjieta2
jjieta1
Notices
255
Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class A Statement
Taiwan Class A Electronic Emission Statement
Taiwan Contact Information

IBM Taiwan Product Service Contact Info: IBM Taiwan Corporation 3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd., Taipei Taiwan Tel: 0800-016-888
Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product might cause radio interference in which case the user might be required to take adequate measures.
256
rusemi
Index Numerics
2101 2101 7014 7014 Model Model model model N00 175 N42 176 T00 rack 177 T42 rack 178 comments sending xxviii connections ASCII terminal console 116, 117 console 117 gateway to external storage 5, 30, 36, 44, 51, 77, 82 storage expansion unit to N series filers 4 storage expansion unit to other storage expansion units 4 storage expansion units to an N series system 3 conventions command xxvii formatting xxviii keyboard xxviii
A
about this document how to send your comments xxviii AC power line sizes 169 active/active configurations 7 adapter support 6 adapter, DB-9 to RJ-45 console 117 adapters optional cards N3600 187 N5200 and N5500 193 N5300 and N5600 201 N6000 series system 211 N6200 series system 221 N7000 series 229 Advanced Single Instance Storage 90 ASCII terminal console connection 116, 117 attention notice xv audience xxiii AutoSupport 167
D
danger notices xiii definition xiii example xiii Data ONTAP 5, 89 Data ONTAP 7.1 documentation 248 Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems library 249 Data ONTAP 7.2 documentation 247 Data ONTAP 7.2 and 7.3 gateway systems library 249 Data ONTAP 7.3 documentation 246 Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode documentation 246 DB-9 to RJ-45 console adapter 117 pin connections 117 disk sanitization 90 documentation Data ONTAP 7.1 248 Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway 249 Data ONTAP 7.2 247 Data ONTAP 7.2 and 7.3 gateway 249 Data ONTAP 7.3 246 Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode 246 EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000 expansion units 245 IBM System Storage N series 244 improvement xxviii N series-related documents 250 N3300, N3400 and N3600 storage systems 245 N3700 storage system 245 N5000 series systems 245 N6000 series systems 245 N7000 series systems 245
C
cables labeling 164 measuring 164 planning 163 caution notices xv definition xv examples xv CFO 90 CIFS protocol 89 clearance dimensions 137, 150, 153 EXN1000 storage expansion unit 148 N3300 storage system 119 N3400 storage system 119 N3600 storage system 119 N3700 storage system 131 N5200 storage system 133 N5300 storage system 133 N5500 storage system 133 N5600 storage system 133 N6210 storage system 142 N6240 storage system 142 N7600 storage system 145 N7700 storage system 145 N7800 storage system 145 N7900 storage system 145 clustering 7 Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables
163
257
E
electrical requirements 153 EXN1000 storage expansion unit 149, 150 EXN2000 storage expansion unit 151, 152 EXN4000 storage expansion unit 152, 153 N3300 storage system 120 N3400 storage system 120 N3600 storage system 120 N3700 storage system 132 N5200 storage system 135 N5300 storage system 135 N5500 storage system 136 N5600 storage system 136 N6040 138 N6040 with PAM cards 139 N6060 140 N6060 with PAM cards 140, 141 N6070 141 N6070 with PAM cards 142 N6210 144 N6240 144, 145 N7600 147 N7700 147 N7800 148 N7900 148 SAS drives 155 SATA drives 155 electrical requirements with Performance Accelerator Module cards N5300 storage system 135 N5600 storage system 136 N7600 storage system 147 N7700 storage system 147 N7800 storage system 148 N7900 storage system 148 environmental notices xiii environmental requirements 137, 153 EXN1000 storage expansion unit 148 N3300 storage system 119 N3400 storage system 119 N3600 storage system 119 N3700 storage system 131 N5200 storage system 133 N5300 storage system 133 N5500 storage system 133 N5600 storage system 133 N6210 storage system 142 N6240 storage system 142 N7600 storage system 145 N7700 storage system 145 N7800 storage system 145 N7900 storage system 145 Ethernet adapter support 6 EXN1000 storage expansion unit hardware features 83 hardware specifications 148 power cords 171 support 2 EXN1000 storage expansion units mixing 3
EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000 expansion units library 245 EXN2000 storage expansion unit hardware features 85 hardware specifications 150 power cords 171 support 2 EXN2000 storage expansion units mixing 3 EXN3000 storage expansion unit hardware features 86 hardware specifications 153 support 2 EXN3000 storage expansion units mixing 3 EXN4000 storage expansion unit hardware features 87 hardware specifications 150 power cords 171 support 2 EXN4000 storage expansion units mixing 3
F
FCP protocol 89 features EXN1000 hardware 84 EXN2000 hardware 85 EXN3000 hardware 87 EXN4000 hardware 88 host software 106 N3300 storage system hardware 9, 12 N3400 storage system hardware 13, 15 N3600 storage system hardware 16, 19 N3700 storage system hardware 20, 23 N5200 filer hardware 23, 27 N5200 gateway hardware 28, 30 N5300 filer hardware 30, 34 N5300 gateway hardware 35, 37 N5500 filer hardware 37, 41 N5500 gateway hardware 42, 44 N5600 filer hardware 45, 49 N5600 gateway hardware 50, 52
258
features (continued) N6040 hardware 52, 56, 61 N6060 hardware 57 N6070 hardware 61, 65 N6210 hardware 66 N6210 and N6240 hardware 69 N6240 hardware 70, 73 N7700 filer hardware 74, 78 N7900 filer hardware 79, 82 power cords 171 software 98 support xxiii filer, defined xxvi FilerView 89 fire suppression xxi FlexCache for NFS 90 FlexClone 90 FlexVol 89 floor loading, T00 rack 180 floor loading, T42 rack 180 floor plan considerations 160 floor-loading specifications 160 FRU/CRU list feature codes 171
hardware specifications (continued) N7900 storage system 145 high availability configurations 7 host software features 106 how to send your comments xxviii
I
IBM safety information 250 Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables input power considerations 159 inspection, safety xvii installation rack xvii interoperability 6 iSCSI protocol 89, 90 163
L
labels, safety xiv laser safety xvi load board, N3700 20
M
MetroCluster 90 Microsoft Exchange Bundle MultiStore 91 91
N
N series related documents 250 N series documentation 244 N series storage system software 89 N00 rack specifications 175 N3300 storage system clearance dimensions 119 electrical requirements 120 environmental requirements 119 features hardware 9 hardware specifications 119 noise emission notes 120 physical characteristics 119 power cords 171 N3300, N3400 and N3600 storage systems library N3400 storage system clearance dimensions 119 electrical requirements 120 environmental requirements 119 features hardware 13 noise emission notes 120 physical characteristics 119 N3600 storage system adapter support 6 clearance dimensions 119 electrical requirements 120 environmental requirements 119
Index
G
gateway connecting to external storage 77, 82 gateway, defined xxvi general considerations 159 5, 30, 36, 44, 51,
H
hardware service and support xxv hardware specifications 137 EXN1000 storage expansion unit EXN2000 storage expansion unit EXN3000 storage expansion unit EXN4000 storage expansion unit N3300 storage system 119 N3600 storage system 119 N3700 storage system 131 N5200 storage system 133 N5300 storage system 133 N5500 storage system 133 N5600 storage system 133 N6210 storage system 142 N6240 storage system 142 N7600 storage system 145 N7700 storage system 145 N7800 storage system 145 148 150 153 150
245
259
N3600 storage system (continued) features hardware 16 hardware specifications 119 noise emission notes 120 physical characteristics 119 power cords 171 N3700 storage system cabling to storage expansion units 21 clearance dimensions 131 differences between early and current CPU module designs 21 electrical requirements 132 environmental requirements 131 features hardware 20 hardware specifications 131 load board 20 noise emission notes 132 physical characteristics 131 power cords 171 N3700 storage system library 245 N42 rack specifications 176 N5000 series systems library 245 N5200 filer features hardware 23 raw storage capacity 26 N5200 gateway features hardware 28 N5200 storage system adapter support 6 clearance dimensions 133 electrical requirements 135 environmental requirements 133 hardware specifications 133 noise emission notes 134 physical characteristics 133 power cords 171 N5300 filer features hardware 30 N5300 gateway features hardware 35 N5300 storage system adapter support 6 clearance dimensions 133 electrical requirements 135 electrical requirements with one Performance Accelerator Module card 135 environmental requirements 133 hardware specifications 133 noise emission notes 134 physical characteristics 133 power cords 171 raw storage capacity 32 N5500 filer features hardware 37
N5500 gateway features hardware 42 N5500 storage system adapter support 6 clearance dimensions 133 electrical requirements 136 environmental requirements 133 hardware specifications 133 noise emission notes 134 physical characteristics 133 power cords 171 raw storage capacity 40 N5600 filer features hardware 45 N5600 gateway features hardware 50 N5600 storage system adapter support 6 clearance dimensions 133 electrical requirements 136 electrical requirements with two Performance Accelerator Module cards 136 environmental requirements 133 hardware specifications 133 noise emission notes 134 physical characteristics 133 power cords 171 raw storage capacity 47 N6000 series systems library 245 N6040 features hardware 52 N6040 storage system raw storage capacity 55 N6060 features hardware 57 N6060 storage system raw storage capacity 59 N6070 features hardware 61 N6070 storage system raw storage capacity 64 N6210 features hardware 66 N6210 storage system clearance dimensions 142 environmental requirements 142 hardware specifications 142 physical characteristics 142 raw storage capacity 68 N6240 features hardware 70 N6240 storage system clearance dimensions 142
260
N6240 storage system (continued) environmental requirements 142 hardware specifications 142 physical characteristics 142 raw storage capacity 72 N7000 series systems library 245 N7600 storage system clearance dimensions 145 electrical requirements with four Performance Accelerator Module I or II cards 147 environmental requirements 145 hardware specifications 145 noise emission notes 147 physical characteristics 145 N7700 filer features hardware 74 N7700 storage system adapter support 6 clearance dimensions 145 electrical requirements with four Performance Accelerator Module I or II cards 147 environmental requirements 145 hardware specifications 145 noise emission notes 147 physical characteristics 145 power cords 171 raw storage capacity 76 N7800 storage system clearance dimensions 145 electrical requirements with five Performance Accelerator Module I or II cards 148 environmental requirements 145 hardware specifications 145 noise emission notes 147 physical characteristics 145 N7900 filer features hardware 79 N7900 storage system adapter support 6 clearance dimensions 145 electrical requirements with five Performance Accelerator Module I or II cards 148 environmental requirements 145 hardware specifications 145 noise emission notes 147 physical characteristics 145 power cords 171 raw storage capacity 81 NearStore 91 NFS protocol 89 noise emission notes EXN1000 storage expansion unit 149 EXN2000 storage expansion unit 151 EXN4000 storage expansion unit 151 N3300 storage system 120 N3400 storage system 120 N3600 storage system 120 N3700 storage system 132 N5200 storage system 134
noise emission notes (continued) N5300 storage system 134 N5500 storage system 134 N5600 storage system 134 N7600 storage system 147 N7700 storage system 147 N7800 storage system 147 N7900 storage system 147 notices 251 attention xv caution xv danger xiii safety xviii safety and environmental xiii types xiii used in this document xxiv
O
Open Systems SnapVault Agents 106 Operation Manager Core (OMC) 106 optical port terminators xvi optional adapter cards descriptions N3600 187 N5200 and N5500 193 N5300 and N5600 201 N6000 series system 211 N6200 series system 221 N7000 series 229 overview, planning 1
P
PCI-Express (PCIe) adapters 231 PCI-X adapters optional 229 physical characteristics 137, 153 EXN1000 storage expansion unit 148 EXN2000 storage expansion unit 150 EXN4000 storage expansion unit 150 N3300 storage system 119 N3400 storage system 119 N3600 storage system 119 N3700 storage system 131 N5200 storage system 133 N5300 storage system 133 N5500 storage system 133 N5600 storage system 133 N6210 storage system 142 N6240 storage system 142 N7600 storage system 145 N7700 storage system 145 N7800 storage system 145 N7900 storage system 145 physical planning 1, 111 planning 1, 111 power cords 157, 171 feature codes 171 power supplies and power requirements 157 Protection Manager 106, 107
Index
261
Provisioning Manager
107
R
rack installation safety xvii rack mount requirements 88, 157 rack relocation xx safety xx rack safety xvii rack specifications for IBM products installed in a non-IBM rack general 181 IBM 2101 Model N00 175 IBM 2101 Model N42 176 IBM 7014 177 reader feedback sending xxviii restrictions, usage xvi
184
S
safety environmental notices xiii inspection procedure xvii labels xiii laser xvi notices xiii, xviii rack xvii rack installation xvii rack relocation xx safety labels xiv safety requirements for non-IBM rack 184 security 161 Single Mailbox Recovery 107 site planning 1, 111 SMBR Administrative Server 107 SMBR Content Analysis Wizard 107 SnapDrive 107 SnapLock Compliance 91 SnapLock Enterprise 91 SnapManager for Exchange 91, 107 SnapManager for Hyper V 108 SnapManager for Hyper-V 91 SnapManager for Oracle 91, 108 SnapManager for Oracle for Windows 108 SnapManager for SAP 91 SnapManager for SharePoint 92 SnapManager for SQL 92, 107 SnapManager for VI 92, 108 SnapMirror 92 SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle 92 SnapMover 92 SnapRestore 92 SnapShot 89 SnapValidator 92 SnapVault Primary 93 SnapVault Secondary 93 software features 98 software, N series storage system 89 specifications for the N series storage system 111
storage expansion unit cabling differences between early and current N3700 CPU module designs 22 storage expansion units cabling requirements 4 connecting to an N series system 3 connecting to N series filers 4 connecting to other storage expansion units 4 connecting to the N3700 22 connecting to the N5200 filer 26 connecting to the N5300 filer 32 connecting to the N5500 filer 40 connecting to the N5600 filer 46 connecting to the N6040 54 connecting to the N6060 59 connecting to the N6070 63 connecting to the N6210 68 connecting to the N6240 72 connecting to the N7700 filer 76 connecting to the N7900 filer 81 mixing 3 support 2 support for Ethernet adapters 6 supported features xxiii SyncMirror 93
T
T00 and T42 rack caster location 178 T00 and T42 rack service clearances 178 T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments 179 T00 rack weight distribution and floor loading 180 T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading 180 tasks by document title 244 terminators optical ports xvi terminology xxvi thermal considerations 159 third-party devices connection differences between early and current N3700 CPU module designs 22
U
usage restrictions xvi
W
web sites, related xxv weight distribution, T00 rack 180 weight distribution, T42 rack 180 Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL) 5
262
Printed in USA
GA32-0543-22

GA32 0543 20 IBM System N Intro and Planning Guide

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

GA32 0543 20 IBM System N Intro and Planning Guide

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

IBM System Storage N series

Introduction and Planning Guide

IBM System Storage N series

Introduction and Planning Guide

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

. 239 . 239 . 240

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2011

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Safety notices and labels

Do not service, there are no serviceable parts.

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

DANGER Multiple power cords

To remove all power to the device, disconnect all power cords.

A generally hazardous condition not represented by other safety symbols.

Sample caution notices:

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Rack safety Rack installation

Safety inspection procedure

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Figure 1. Ground check

Rack relocation (19" rack)

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Relocating the rack

Fire suppression systems

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

About this book

Who should read this document

How this document is organized

Notices and statements used in this document

Getting information, help, and service

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Before you call

Using the documentation

Hardware service and support

About this book

Supported servers and operating systems

Terminology and conventions used in this document

Active/active and high-availability terms

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

About this book

How to send your comments

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

v A detailed description of any information that should be changed

About this book

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system

IBM N series storage systems and storage expansion units

v EXN4000 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 87

Storage expansion unit support

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Intermixing EXN units

Connecting storage expansion units to N series systems

Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system

Storage expansion unit cabling requirements

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Connecting a gateway to external storage

Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL)

Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

High availability or active/active configurations